TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND ... · BID PACKAGE E: Alternate # E-3 – MOSAIC...

1961 RTA WSP 2020 RENOVATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS DESIGN GROUP 3, LLC

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00 0110 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 4100 RESERVED

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 2300 ALTERNATES 01 3000 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 3216 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 5000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 6000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 7000 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 7800 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 4100 DEMOLITION

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 03 3000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

DIVISION 04 - MASONRY 04 2000 UNIT MASONRY

DIVISION 05 - METALS 05 1200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 4000 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 5000 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 7500 DECORATIVE METAL COLUMN COVERS

DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 1000 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 2000 FINISH CARPENTRY 06 6116 SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 2100 THERMAL INSULATION 07 6200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 8400 FIRESTOPPING 07 9200 JOINT SEALANTS

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 08 1113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 3313 COILING COUNTER DOORS 08 3613 SECTIONAL DOORS 08 4113 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES 08 4229 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 08 4313 ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONTS 08 4413 ALUMINUM GLAZED CURTAINWALL 08 4523 TRANSLUCENT SKYLIGHT SYSTEM 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE 08 8000 GLAZING

cmesser

Cross-Out

cmesser

Cross-Out

1961 RTA WSP 2020 RENOVATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS DESIGN GROUP 3, LLC

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 09 2116 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 3000 TILING 09 5100 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 6623.16 EPOXY TERRAZO 09 9123 PAINTING

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10 7113 EXTERIOR SUN SHADES AND AWNINGS

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 26 0500 COMMON WORK ELECTRICAL 26 0519 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 3f 26 0553 IDENTIFCATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 26 5600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING

1961 RTA WSP 2020 REVISIONS DESIGN GROUP 3, LLC

01 2300 - 1 ALTERNATES

SECTION 01 2300 ALTERNATES

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Description of Alternates. B. Procedures for pricing Alternates. C. Documentation of changes to Contract Price and Contract Time.

1.02 ACCEPTANCE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternates quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at Owner's option.

Accepted Alternates will be identified in the Owner-Contractor Agreement. B. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work to integrate the Work of each Alternate.

1.03 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. BID PACKAGE A: Alternate # A-1 – ELIMINATE STOREFRONT DOORS:

1. Base Bid Item: Sections 08 4113 & 08 4413 and Drawing number A1.1 Note #12 including: Provide and install exterior Storefront Doors # 102, 103, 106 & 107 at tenant spaces.

2. Alternate Item: Sections 08 4113 & 08 4413 and Drawing number A1.1 Note #12 including: Delete exterior Storefront Doors # 102, 103, 106 & 107 at tenant spaces. Infill opening with Curtain wall construction to match adjacent construction.

B. BID PACKAGE B: Alternate # B-1–ALTERNATE LIGHT FIXTURES–AMERICAN BUILDING: 1. Base Bid Item: Section 26 5600 and Drawings number T1.1, A1.1 & A1.2- including:

Provide and install new lighting and controls as drawn and specified. 2. Alternate Item: Section 26 5600 and Drawings number T1.1, A1.1 & A1.2- including:

Delete Media Tube (T-1.1) fixture and installation at the American Building. C. BID PACKAGE B: Alternate # B-2–ALTERNATE LIGHT FIXTURES–COOPER BUILDING:

1. Base Bid Item: Section 26 5600 and Drawings number T1.1, A1.1 & A1.2- including: Provide and install new lighting and controls as drawn and specified.

2. Alternate Item: Section 26 5600 and Drawings number T1.1, A1.1 & A1.2- including: Delete Media Tube (T-1.1) fixture and installation at the Cooper Building.

D. BID PACKAGE B: Alternate # B-3–ALTERNATE LIGHT FIXTURES–LaFEE BUILDING: 1. Base Bid Item: Section 26 5600 and Drawings number T1.1, A1.1 & A1.2- including:

Provide and install new lighting and controls as drawn and specified. 2. Alternate Item: Section 26 5600 and Drawings number T1.1, A1.1 & A1.2- including:

Delete Media Tube (T-1.1) fixture and installation at the LaFee Building. E. BID PACKAGE E: Alternate # E-1 – SIMPLIFIED GREEK KEY BORDER:

1. Base Bid Item: Section 09 6623.16 and Drawing number A1.1 including: Provide and install Epoxy Terrazzo, including integral “Greek Key” border as drawn and specified.

2. Alternate Item: Section 09 6623.16 and Drawing number A1.1 including: Provide and install Epoxy Terrazzo with simplified “Greek key” border as drawn and specified.

F. BID PACKAGE E: Alternate # E-2 – MODIFIED BORDER: 1. Base Bid Item: Section 09 6623.16 and Drawing number A1.1 including: Provide and

install Epoxy Terrazzo, including integral “Greek Key” border as drawn and specified. 2. Alternate Item: Section 09 6623.16 and Drawing number A1.1 including: Provide and

install Epoxy Terrazzo with simplified border as drawn and specified. G BID PACKAGE E: Alternate # E-3 – MOSAIC TILE FLOORING:

1. Base Bid Item: Section 09 6623.16 and Drawing number A1.1 including: Provide and install Epoxy Terrazzo, including integral “Greek Key” border as drawn and specified.

2. Alternate Item: Section 09 3000 and Drawing number A1.1 including: Provide and install Mosaic Tile flooring, including “Greek Key” border to match existing..


01 2300 - 2 ALTERNATES

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED

END OF SECTION


01 3000 - 1 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 3000 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS


A. General administrative requirements. B. Preconstruction meeting. C. Site mobilization meeting. D. Progress meetings. E. Construction progress schedule. F. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout. G. Number of copies of submittals. H. Requests for Interpretation (RFI) procedures. I. Submittal procedures.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 3216 - Construction Progress Schedule: Form, content, and administration of

schedules. B. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: General product requirements. C. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Additional coordination

requirements. D. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents; operation and maintenance

data; warranties and bonds. 1.03 GENERAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with requirements of Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements for coordination of execution of administrative tasks with timing of construction activities.

B. Make the following types of submittals to Architect: 1. Requests for Information (RFI). 2. Requests for substitution. 3. Shop drawings, product data, and samples. 4. Test and inspection reports. 5. Design data. 6. Manufacturer's instructions and field reports. 7. Applications for payment and change order requests. 8. Progress schedules. 9. Coordination drawings. 10. Correction Punch List and Final Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion. 11. Closeout submittals.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING

A. Owner will schedule a meeting after Notice of Award. B. Attendance Required:

1. Owner. 2. Architect. 3. Contractor.

C. Agenda: 1. Execution of Owner-Contractor Agreement.



2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 3. Distribution of Conformed Documents. 4. Submission of list of subcontractors, list of products, schedule of values, and progress

schedule. 5. Submission of initial Submittal schedule. 6. Designation of personnel representing the parties to Contract, and Architect. 7. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for

payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures. 8. Scheduling.

D. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect.

3.02 SITE MOBILIZATION MEETING A. Owner will schedule meeting at the Project site prior to Contractor occupancy. B. Attendance Required:

1. Contractor. 2. Owner. 3. Architect. 4. Contractor's superintendent. 5. Major subcontractors.

C. Agenda: 1. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor. 2. Owner's requirements. 3. Construction facilities and controls provided by Owner. 4. Temporary utilities provided by Owner. 5. Survey and building layout. 6. Security and housekeeping procedures. 7. Schedules. 8. Application for payment procedures. 9. Procedures for testing. 10. Procedures for maintaining record documents. 11. Requirements for start-up of equipment. 12. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period.

D. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Contractor.

3.03 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the work at maximum bi-monthly

intervals. B. Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at

meetings. C. Attendance Required:

1. Contractor. 2. Owner. 3. Architect. 4. Contractor's superintendent. 5. Major subcontractors.

D. Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems that impede, or will impede, planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals.



6. Review of RFIs log and status of responses. 7. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 8. Maintenance of progress schedule. 9. Corrective measures which may be required to regain projected schedules. 10. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 11. Coordination of projected progress. 12. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 13. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 14. Other business relating to work.

E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Contractor.

3.04 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE - SEE SECTION 01 3216 A. Within 10 days after date of the Agreement, submit preliminary schedule defining planned

operations for the first 60 days of work, with a general outline for remainder of work. B. If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within 10 days. C. Within 20 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed complete

schedule for review. 1. Include written certification that major contractors have reviewed and accepted proposed

schedule. D. Within 10 days after joint review, submit complete schedule. E. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment.

3.05 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFI) A. Definition: A request seeking one of the following:

1. An interpretation, amplification, or clarification of some requirement of Contract Documents arising from inability to determine from them the exact material, process, or system to be installed; or when the elements of construction are required to occupy the same space (interference); or when an item of work is described differently at more than one place in the Contract Documents.

B. Preparation: Prepare an RFI immediately upon discovery of a need for interpretation of Contract Documents. Failure to submit a RFI in a timely manner is not a legitimate cause for claiming additional costs or delays in execution of the work. 1. Prepare a separate RFI for each specific item. 2. Prepare in a format and with content acceptable to Owner.

C. Reason for the RFI: Prior to initiation of an RFI, carefully study all Contract Documents to confirm that information sufficient for their interpretation is definitely not included. 1. Unacceptable Uses for RFIs: Do not use RFIs to request the following::

a. Approval of submittals (use procedures specified elsewhere in this section). b. Approval of substitutions (see Section - 01 6000 - Product Requirements) c. Different methods of performing work than those indicated in the Contract Drawings

and Specifications (comply with provisions of the Conditions of the Contract). 2. Frivolous RFIs: Requests regarding information that is clearly indicated on, or reasonably

inferable from, Contract Documents, with no additional input required to clarify the question. They will be returned without a response, with an explanatory notation.

D. RFI Log: Prepare and maintain a tabular log of RFIs for the duration of the project. E. Responses: Content of answered RFIs will not constitute in any manner a directive or

authorization to perform extra work or delay the project. If in Contractor's belief it is likely to lead to a change to Contract Sum or Contract Time, promptly issue a notice to this effect, and follow up with an appropriate Change Order request to Owner.

3.06 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. Submit to Architect for review a schedule for submittals in tabular format.



1. Submit at the same time as the preliminary schedule specified in Section - 01 3216 - Construction Progress Schedule.

2. Format schedule to allow tracking of status of submittals throughout duration of construction.

3. Account for time required for preparation, review, manufacturing, fabrication and delivery when establishing submittal delivery and review deadline dates. a. For assemblies, equipment, systems comprised of multiple components and/or

requiring detailed coordination with other work, allow for additional time to make corrections or revisions to initial submittals, and time for their review.

3.07 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review:

1. Product data. 2. Shop drawings. 3. Samples for selection. 4. Samples for verification.

B. Submit to Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for compliance with information given and the design concept expressed in Contract Documents.

C. Samples will be reviewed for aesthetic, color, or finish selection. D. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

article below and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals.

3.08 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information:

1. Design data. 2. Certificates. 3. Test reports. 4. Inspection reports. 5. Manufacturer's instructions. 6. Manufacturer's field reports. 7. Other types indicated.

B. Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. 3.09 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT

A. Submit Final Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion. B. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout in

compliance with requirements of Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: 1. Project record documents. 2. Operation and maintenance data. 3. Warranties. 4. Bonds. 5. Other types as indicated.

C. Submit for Owner's benefit during and after project completion. 3.10 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS

A. Documents for Review: 1. Small Size Sheets, Not Larger Than 8-1/2 by 11 inches: Submit the number of copies that

Contractor requires, plus two copies that will be retained by Architect. 2. Larger Sheets, Not Larger Than 36 by 48 inches: Submit the number of opaque

reproductions that Contractor requires, plus two copies that will be retained by Architect. B. Documents for Information: Submit two copies.



C. Samples: Submit the number specified in individual specification sections; one of which will be retained by Architect. 1. After review, produce duplicates. 2. Retained samples will not be returned to Contractor unless specifically so stated.

3.11 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General Requirements:

1. Use a separate transmittal for each item. 2. Transmit using approved form.

a. Use Contractor's form, subject to prior approval by Architect. 3. Sequentially identify each item. For revised submittals use original number and a

sequential numerical suffix. 4. Identify: Project; Contractor; subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail

number; and specification section number and article/paragraph, as appropriate on each copy.

5. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the work and Contract Documents. a. Submittals from sources other than the Contractor, or without Contractor's stamp will

not be acknowledged, reviewed, or returned. 6. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items. 7. Identify variations from Contract Documents and product or system limitations that may be

detrimental to successful performance of the completed work. 8. Provide space for Contractor and Architect review stamps. 9. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission. 10. Distribute reviewed submittals. Instruct parties to promptly report inability to comply with

requirements. B. Shop Drawing Procedures:

1. Prepare accurate, drawn-to-scale, original shop drawing documentation by interpreting Contract Documents and coordinating related work.

2. Do not reproduce Contract Documents to create shop drawings. 3. Generic, non-project-specific information submitted as shop drawings do not meet the

requirements for shop drawings. C. Samples Procedures:

1. Transmit related items together as single package. 2. Identify each item to allow review for applicability in relation to shop drawings showing

installation locations. 3.12 SUBMITTAL REVIEW

A. Submittals for Review: Architect will review each submittal, and approve, or take other appropriate action.

B. Submittals for Information: Architect will acknowledge receipt and review. See below for actions to be taken.

C. Architect's actions will be reflected by marking each returned submittal using virtual stamp on electronic submittals.

D. Architect's and consultants' actions on items submitted for review: 1. Authorizing purchasing, fabrication, delivery, and installation:

a. "Approved", or language with same legal meaning. b. "Approved as Noted, Resubmission not required", or language with same legal

meaning. 1) At Contractor's option, submit corrected item, with review notations

acknowledged and incorporated. c. "Approved as Noted, Resubmit for Record", or language with same legal meaning.



1) Resubmit corrected item, with review notations acknowledged and incorporated. Resubmit separately, or as part of project record documents.

2. Not Authorizing fabrication, delivery, and installation: a. "Revise and Resubmit".

1) Resubmit revised item, with review notations acknowledged and incorporated. b. "Rejected".

1) Submit item complying with requirements of Contract Documents. E. Architect's and consultants' actions on items submitted for information:

1. Items for which no action was taken: a. "Received" - to notify the Contractor that the submittal has been received for record

only. 2. Items for which action was taken:

a. "Reviewed" - no further action is required from Contractor. END OF SECTION


01 3216 - 1 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE

SECTION 01 3216 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 2.01 SCHEDULE FORMAT

A. Prepare schedule in the form of a horizontal bar (gnant) chart. 2.02 CONTENT

A. Identify each item by specification section number. B. Include conferences and meetings in schedule. C. Show accumulated percentage of completion of each item, and total percentage of Work

completed, as of the first day of each month. D. Provide separate schedule of submittal dates for shop drawings, product data, and samples,

owner-furnished products, products identified under Allowances, and dates reviewed submittals will be required from Architect. Indicate decision dates for selection of finishes.

E. Indicate delivery dates for owner-furnished products. F. Provide legend for symbols and abbreviations used.

2.03 BAR CHARTS A. Include a separate bar for each major portion of Work or operation. B. Identify the first work day of each week.

2.04 REVIEW AND EVALUATION OF SCHEDULE A. Participate in joint review and evaluation of schedule with Architect at each submittal. B. Evaluate project status to determine work behind schedule and work ahead of schedule. C. After review, revise as necessary as result of review, and resubmit within 10 days.

2.05 UPDATING SCHEDULE A. Update and submit revised schedule with each Application for Payment. B. Indicate progress of each activity to date of revision, with projected completion date of each

activity. C. Annotate diagrams to graphically depict current status of Work. D. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in Work, and other

identifiable changes. E. Indicate changes required to maintain Date of Substantial Completion. F. Submit reports required to support recommended changes. G. Provide narrative report to define problem areas, anticipated delays, and impact on the

schedule. Report corrective action taken or proposed and its effect. 2.06 DISTRIBUTION OF SCHEDULE

A. Distribute copies of updated schedules to Contractor's project site file, to subcontractors, suppliers, Architect, Owner, and other concerned parties.

B. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections indicated in schedules.

END OF SECTION


01 4000 - 1 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS


A. Submittals. B. Quality assurance. C. Testing and inspection agencies and services. D. Control of installation. E. Mock-ups. F. Manufacturers' field services. G. Defect Assessment.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 2100 - Allowances: Allowance for payment of testing services. B. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Design Data: Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited purpose

of assessing compliance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents, or for Owner's information.

C. Test Reports: After each test/inspection, promptly submit two copies of report to Architect and to Contractor.

D. Manufacturer's Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, for the Owner's information. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications:

1. Prior to start of work, submit agency name, address, and telephone number, and names of full time registered Engineer and responsible officer.

1.05 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES AND SERVICES A. Contractor shall employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform other

specified testing. B. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in

accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION

A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce work of specified quality.

B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from

Architect before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the work except where more stringent

tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship.



E. Have work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the

manufacturer. G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand

stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement. 3.02 MOCK-UPS

A. Before installing portions of the Work where mock-ups are required, construct mock-ups in location and size indicated for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work. The purpose of mock-up is to demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.

B. Tests shall be performed under provisions identified in this section and identified in the respective product specification sections.

C. Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchorage devices, flashings, seals, and finishes.

D. Accepted mock-ups shall be a comparison standard for the remaining Work. E. Where mock-up has been accepted by Architect and is specified in product specification

sections to be removed, protect mock-up throughout construction, remove mock-up and clear area when directed to do so by Architect.

3.03 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. See individual specification sections for testing and inspection required. B. Testing Agency Duties:

1. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of services.

2. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards.

3. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 4. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-compliance of

Work or products. 5. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Architect. 6. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified.

C. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority: 1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract

Documents. 2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor. 4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work.

D. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be

used that require testing, along with proposed mix designs. 2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to

manufacturers' facilities. 3. Provide incidental labor and facilities:

a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected. b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be

tested/inspected. c. To facilitate tests/inspections. d. To provide storage and curing of test samples.

4. Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring testing/inspection services.

5. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements.



E. Re-testing required because of non-compliance with specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by Architect.

F. Re-testing required because of non-compliance with specified requirements shall be paid for by Contractor.

3.04 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or

manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust, and balance equipment, and as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary.

B. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions.

3.05 DEFECT ASSESSMENT A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not complying with specified requirements. B. If, in the opinion of Owner, it is not practical to remove and replace the work, Owner will direct

an appropriate remedy or adjust payment. END OF SECTION

1961 RTA WSP 2020 REVISIONS 01 5000 - 1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS DESIGN GROUP 3, LLC

SECTION 01 5000

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.

1.02 USE CHARGES A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be

included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, occupants of Project, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.

1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas

for construction personnel. B. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities

having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire-prevention program.

C. Moisture-Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and construction from water absorption and damage. 1. Describe delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials subject to water

absorption or water damage. 2. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, such as sprayed fire-resistive

materials, plastering, and terrazzo grinding, and describe plans for dealing with water from these operations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to permit installation of finish materials.

D. Dust- and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the dust- and HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify further options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate. Include the following: 1. Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of work. 2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing. 3. Location of proposed air-filtration system discharge. 4. Waste handling procedures. 5. Other dust-control measures.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for

temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect

each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S.

Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1.

1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to

assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent


service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Dust-Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by 60 inches. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. 1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 011000 "Summary."

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.02 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following:

1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241.

2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.

B. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and

utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

C. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. 1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings. 2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public

and individuals seeking entrance to Project. a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and

visitors. 3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.

3.03 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. See Drawings for additional Security and Temporary Protection Measures. B. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures,

utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.

C. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.

D. Tree and Plant Protection: Comply with requirements specified in Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection."

E. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance,


vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day.

F. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

G. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3.04 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL A. Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document

visible signs of mold that may appear during construction. B. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the

building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows: 1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dried-in

conditions. 2. Use permanent HVAC system to control humidity. 3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity,

and exposure to water limits. a. Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and

gypsum-based products, that become wet during the course of construction and remain wet for 48 hours are considered defective.

b. Remove materials that cannot be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level within 48 hours.

3.05 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste

and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.

C. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of

Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used

during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."

END OF SECTION


01 6000 - 1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 6000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS


A. General product requirements. B. Re-use of existing products. C. Transportation, handling, storage and protection. D. Product option requirements. E. Substitution limitations. F. Procedures for Owner-supplied products. G. Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software.

1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 01 3000 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS, for Submittal requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EXISTING PRODUCTS

A. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises unless specifically required or permitted by Contract Documents.

B. Unforeseen historic items encountered remain the property of the Owner; notify Owner promptly upon discovery; protect, remove, handle, and store as directed by Owner.

2.02 NEW PRODUCTS A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by Contract Documents.

2.03 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting

those standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the

manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions:

Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named. 2.04 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software of types and in quantities specified in individual specification sections.

B. Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUBSTITUTION LIMITATIONS

A. Requests for Substitution must be submitted in writing to the Architect. 3.02 OWNER-SUPPLIED PRODUCTS

A. Owner's Responsibilities: 1. Arrange for and deliver Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples, to

Contractor. 2. On delivery, inspect products jointly with Contractor. 3. Submit claims for transportation damage and replace damaged, defective, or deficient

items. 4. Arrange for manufacturers' warranties, inspections, and service.

B. Contractor's Responsibilities: 1. Review shop drawings, product data, and samples.


01 6000 - 2 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

3.03 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Package products for shipment in manner to prevent damage; for equipment, package to avoid

loss of factory calibration. B. If special precautions are required, attach instructions prominently and legibly on outside of

packaging. C. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site

storage time and potential damage to stored materials. D. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are

correct, and products are undamaged. F. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling,

disfigurement, or damage, and to minimize handling. G. Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible.

3.04 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to

installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and misapplication.

B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible. D. Store sensitive products in weathertight, climate-controlled enclosures in an environment

favorable to product. E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. F. Protect products from damage or deterioration due to construction operations, weather,

precipitation, humidity, temperature, sunlight and ultraviolet light, dirt, dust, and other contaminants.

G. Comply with manufacturer's warranty conditions, if any. H. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to

prevent condensation and degradation of products. I. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining. J. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling,

disfigurement, or damage. K. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify

products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. END OF SECTION

1961 RTA WSP STOREFRONTS DESIGN GROUP 3, LLC

01 7000 - 1 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 7000 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS


A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures. B. Pre-installation meetings. C. Cutting and patching. D. Surveying for laying out the work. E. Cleaning and protection. F. Demonstration and instruction of Owner personnel. G. Closeout procedures, including Contractor's Correction Punch List, except payment

procedures. 1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 – ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS, for submittal procedures. B. Survey work: Submit name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting survey

work. 1. On request, submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work. 2. Submit a copy of site drawing signed by the Land Surveyor, that the elevations and

locations of the work are in compliance with Contract Documents. 3. Submit surveys and survey logs for the project record.

C. Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration that affects: 1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate Contractor. 6. Include in request:

a. Identification of Project. b. Location and description of affected work. c. Necessity for cutting or alteration. d. Description of proposed work and products to be used. e. Alternatives to cutting and patching. f. Date and time work will be executed.

D. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities. E. Closeout Submittals 1. See Section 01 7800 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

1.03 QUALIFICATIONS A. For surveying work, employ a land surveyor registered in the State in which the Project is

located and acceptable to Architect. Submit evidence of surveyor's Errors and Omissions insurance coverage in the form of an Insurance Certificate. Employ only individual(s) trained and experienced in collecting and recording accurate data relevant to ongoing construction activities,

1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain

pumping equipment. B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site

from soil erosion.



C. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.

D. Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere and over adjacent property.

1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to

ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later.

B. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements. C. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible

with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment.

D. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work that are indicated diagrammatically on drawings. Follow routing indicated for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.

E. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.

F. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections. G. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work

and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS

A. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching and extending work.

B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products where necessary, referring to existing work as a standard.

C. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution described in Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions.

B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being applied or attached.

C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize

waste due to over-ordering or misfabrication. E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct

locations. F. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements

subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work, assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.



B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to

applying any new material or substance in contact or bond. 3.03 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. When required in individual specification sections, convene a preinstallation meeting at the site prior to commencing work of the section.

B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section. C. Notify Architect four days in advance of meeting date. D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting:

1. Review conditions of examination, preparation and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related work.

E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.

3.04 LAYING OUT THE WORK A. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work. B. Promptly notify Architect of any discrepancies discovered. C. Contractor shall locate and protect survey control and reference points. D. Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points

during construction. E. Promptly report to Architect the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation required

because of changes in grades or other reasons. F. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes

without prior written notice to Architect. G. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices. H. Establish a minimum of two permanent bench marks on site, referenced to established control

points. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on project record documents. I. Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar

appropriate means: 1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement;

utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations. 2. Grid or axis for structures. 3. Building foundation, column locations, ground floor elevations.

J. Periodically verify layouts by same means. K. Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. L. On completion of foundation walls and major site improvements, prepare a certified survey

illustrating dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and site work. 3.05 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement.

B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and

horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated. D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated. E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance.

3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching.



B. Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to: 1. Complete the work. 2. Fit products together to integrate with other work. 3. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services. 4. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work. 5. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition. 6. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work. 7. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested. 8. Remove and replace defective and non-complying work.

C. Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to original condition.

D. Employ original installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces.

E. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval.

F. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. G. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. H. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids

with fire rated material in accordance with Section 07 8400, to full thickness of the penetrated element.

I. Patching: 1. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. On continuous

surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.

2. Match color, texture, and appearance. 3. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other

imperfections due to patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repair substrate prior to repairing finish.

3.07 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly

condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed

or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning

to eliminate dust. D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and

dispose off-site; do not burn or bury. 3.08 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK

A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations. B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate

work area to prevent damage. D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. E. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement

of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is

necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer.



3.09 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to

date of Substantial Completion. B. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance,

and shutdown of each item of equipment at scheduled time, at equipment location. C. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other

season within six months. D. Provide a qualified person who is knowledgeable about the Project to perform demonstration

and instruction of Owner's personnel. E. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual

with Owner's personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. F. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for

additional data becomes apparent during instruction. 3.10 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. 3.11 FINAL CLEANING

A. Execute final cleaning prior to final project assessment. 1. Clean areas to be occupied by Owner prior to final completion before Owner occupancy.

B. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous. C. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains

and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.

D. Remove all labels that are not permanent. Do not paint or otherwise cover fire test labels or nameplates on mechanical and electrical equipment.

E. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned.

F. Clean filters of operating equipment. G. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, scuppers, overflow drains, area drains, and

drainage systems. H. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. I. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site;

dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury. 3.12 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

A. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities. 1. Provide copies to Architect and Owner.

B. Accompany Project Coordinator on preliminary inspection to determine items to be listed for completion or correction in the Contractor's Correction Punch List for Contractor's Notice of Substantial Completion.

C. Notify Architect when work is considered ready for Architect's Substantial Completion inspection.

D. Submit written certification containing Contractor's Correction Punch List, that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's Substantial Completion inspection.

E. Conduct Substantial Completion inspection and create Final Correction Punch List containing Architect's and Contractor's comprehensive list of items identified to be completed or corrected and submit to Architect.



F. Correct items of work listed in Final Correction Punch List and comply with requirements for access to Owner-occupied areas.

G. Accompany Owner and Architect on Contractor's preliminary final inspection. H. Notify Architect when work is considered finally complete and ready for Architect's Substantial

Completion final inspection. I. Complete items of work determined by Architect listed in executed Certificate of Substantial

Completion. 3.13 MAINTENANCE

A. Provide service and maintenance of components indicated in Specification Sections. B. Maintenance Period: As indicated in specification sections or, if not indicated, not less than

one year from the Date of Substantial Completion or the length of the specified warranty, whichever is longer.

C. Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust, and lubricate as required.

D. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component.

E. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor without prior written consent of the Owner.

END OF SECTION

1961 RTA WSP 2020 RENOVATIONS DESIGN GROUP 3, LLC

01 7800 - 1 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

SECTION 01 7800 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS


A. Project Record Documents. B. Operation and Maintenance Data. C. Warranties and bonds.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings,

product data, and samples. B. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Contract closeout procedures. C. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data. D. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for

Payment. B. Operation and Maintenance Data:

1. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start of Work. Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments.

2. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by Owner, submit completed documents within ten days after acceptance.

3. Submit one copy of completed documents 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy will be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Architect comments. Revise content of all document sets as required prior to final submission.

4. Submit two sets of revised final documents in final form within 10 days after final inspection.

C. Warranties and Bonds: 1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with

Owner's permission, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance. 2. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final

Application for Payment. 3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial

Completion, submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. 6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting.

B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner. C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction. D. Record information concurrent with construction progress.



E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications.

F. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum. 2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances,

referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction,

referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Details not on original Contract drawings.

3.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Source Data: For each product or system, list names, addresses and telephone numbers of

Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts. B. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and

data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information. C. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and

systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings.

D. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions.

3.03 ASSEMBLY OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Assemble operation and maintenance data into durable manuals for Owner's personnel use,

with data arranged in the same sequence as, and identified by, the specification sections. B. Where systems involve more than one specification section, provide separate tabbed divider for

each system. C. Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 by 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic

covers; 2 inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings.

D. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS; identify title of Project; identify subject matter of contents.

E. Project Directory: Title and address of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Consultants, Contractor and Subcontractors, with names of responsible parties.

F. Tables of Contents: List every item separated by a divider, using the same identification as on the divider tab; where multiple volumes are required, include all volumes Tables of Contents in each volume, with the current volume clearly identified.

G. Dividers: Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system; identify the contents on the divider tab; immediately following the divider tab include a description of product and major component parts of equipment.

H. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 20 pound paper. I. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to

size of text pages. J. Arrangement of Contents: Organize each volume in parts as follows:

1. Project Directory. 2. Table of Contents, of all volumes, and of this volume. 3. Operation and Maintenance Data: Arranged by system, then by product category.



a. Product data, shop drawings, and other submittals. b. Operation and maintenance data. c. Field quality control data. d. Photocopies of warranties and bonds.

3.04 WARRANTIES AND BONDS A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers,

and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until Date of Substantial completion is determined.

B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. C. Co-execute submittals when required. D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. E. Manual: Bind in commercial quality 8-1/2 by 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable

plastic covers. F. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES AND BONDS, with title of

Project; name, address and telephone number of Contractor and equipment supplier; and name of responsible company principal.

G. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the Project Manual, with each item identified with the number and title of the specification section in which specified, and the name of product or work item.

H. Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of Contents listing. Provide full information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List Subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal.

END OF SECTION


02 4100 - 1 DEMOLITION

SECTION 02 4100 DEMOLITION


A. Selective demolition of building elements for alteration purposes. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Site fences, security, protective barriers, and waste removal.

B. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Handling and storage of items removed for salvage and relocation.

C. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Project conditions; protection of bench marks, survey control points, and existing construction to remain; reinstallation of removed products; temporary bracing and shoring.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 29 CFR 1926 - U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Standards; current edition.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Site Plan: Showing:

1. Areas for temporary construction and field offices. C. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities

and subsurface construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Not used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SCOPE

A. Remove portions of existing buildings as indicated and as required to accomplish the Work B. Remove other items indicated, for salvage, relocation, and recycling. C. Fill excavations, open pits, and holes in ground areas generated as result of removals.

3.02 GENERAL PROCEDURES AND PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with applicable codes and regulations for demolition operations and safety of adjacent

structures and the public. 1. Obtain required permits. 2. Take precautions to prevent catastrophic or uncontrolled collapse of structures to be

removed; do not allow worker or public access within range of potential collapse of unstable structures.

3. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices. 4. Conduct operations to minimize effects on and interference with adjacent structures and

occupants. 5. Do not close or obstruct roadways or sidewalks without permit. 6. Conduct operations to minimize obstruction of public and private entrances and exits; do

not obstruct required exits at any time; protect persons using entrances and exits from removal operations.

7. Obtain written permission from owners of adjacent properties when demolition equipment will traverse, infringe upon or limit access to their property.

B. Do not begin removal until receipt of notification to proceed from Owner.

http://www.ecfr.gov/



C. Do not begin removal until built elements to be salvaged or relocated have been removed. D. Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed.

1. Provide bracing and shoring. 2. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures. 3. Stop work immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger.

E. Minimize production of dust due to demolition operations; do not use water if that will result in ice, flooding, sedimentation of public waterways or storm sewers, or other pollution.

F. Hazardous Materials: Comply with 29 CFR 1926 and state and local regulations. G. Partial Removal of Paving and Curbs: Neatly saw cut at right angle to surface.

3.03 EXISTING UTILITIES A. Coordinate work with utility companies; notify before starting work and comply with their

requirements; obtain required permits. B. Protect existing utilities to remain from damage. C. Do not disrupt public utilities without permit from authority having jurisdiction. D. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing life safety systems that are in use without at least 7

days prior written notification to Owner. E. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing utility branches or take-offs that are in use without at

least 3 days prior written notification to Owner. F. Locate and mark utilities to remain; mark using highly visible tags or flags, with identification of

utility type; protect from damage due to subsequent construction, using substantial barricades if necessary.

G. Remove exposed piping, valves, meters, equipment, supports, and foundations of disconnected and abandoned utilities.

3.04 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ALTERATIONS A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and

existing record documents only. 1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as indicated. 2. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation. 3. Beginning of demolition work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions that would be

apparent upon examination prior to starting demolition. B. Separate areas in which demolition is being conducted from other areas that are still occupied.

1. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary dustproof partitions of construction specified in Section 01 5000 in locations indicated on drawings.

C. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work. 1. Remove items indicated on drawings.

D. Services (Including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical, and Telecommunications): Remove existing systems and equipment as indicated. 1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to

equipment and operational components. 2. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new

services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready for service.

3. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities before removal. 4. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, including those above

accessible ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stub and tag with identification.

E. Protect existing work to remain. 1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary. 2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work.




3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work. 4. Patch as specified for patching new work.

3.05 DEBRIS AND WASTE REMOVAL A. Remove debris, junk, and trash from site daily. B. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work. C. Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands.

END OF SECTION


03 3000 - 1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

SECTION 03 3000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE


A. Concrete formwork. B. Concrete reinforcement. C. Joint devices associated with concrete work. D. Miscellaneous concrete elements, including equipment pads. E. Concrete curing.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Products and installation for sealants and joint fillers for saw

cut joints and isolation joints in slabs. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010.

B. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete; 1991 (Reapproved 2009).

C. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; 2010 (Errata 2012). D. ACI 302.1R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; 2004 (Errata 2007). E. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; 2000. F. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; 2010. G. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; 2010. H. ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; 2001 (Reapproved 2008). I. ASTM C39/C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete

Specimens; 2016b. J. ASTM E1155 - Standard Test Method for Determining F(F) Floor Flatness and F(L) Floor

Levelness Numbers; 1996 (Reapproved 2008). 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products showing compliance with

specified requirements and installation instructions. 1. For curing compounds, provide data on method of removal in the event of incompatibility

with floor covering adhesives. C. Mix Design: Submit proposed concrete mix design.

1. Indicate proposed mix design complies with requirements of ACI 301, Section 4 - Concrete Mixtures.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318. B. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather. C. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK

A. Formwork Design and Construction: Comply with guidelines of ACI 347R to provide formwork that will produce concrete complying with tolerances of ACI 117.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ACI%20117

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ACI%20211.1


http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ACI%20302.1R

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ACI%20304R




http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20C39/C39M

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20E1155



https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ACI%20318







B. Form Materials: Contractor's choice of standard products with sufficient strength to withstand hydrostatic head without distortion in excess of permitted tolerances. 1. Form Facing for Exposed Finish Concrete: Contractor's choice of materials that will

provide smooth, stain-free final appearance. 2. Earth Cuts: Do not use earth cuts as forms for vertical surfaces. Natural rock formations

that maintain a stable vertical edge may be used as side forms. 3. Form Coating: Release agent that will not adversely affect concrete or interfere with

application of coatings. 4. Form Ties: Cone snap type that will leave no metal within 1-1/2 inches of concrete

surface. 2.02 REINFORCEMENT MATERIALS

A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 (60,000 psi). 1. Type: Deformed billet-steel bars. 2. Finish: Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A767/A767M, Class I, unless otherwise

indicated. B. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement (WWR): Galvanized, plain type, ASTM A1064/A1064M. C. Reinforcement Accessories:

1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage, 0.0508 inch. 2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of

reinforcement during concrete placement. 3. Provide stainless steel, galvanized, plastic, or plastic coated steel components for

placement within 1-1/2 inches of weathering surfaces. 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I - Normal Portland type. 1. Acquire cement for entire project from same source.

B. Water: ASTM C1602/C1602M; clean, potable, and not detrimental to concrete. C. Structural Fiber Reinforcement: ASTM C1116/C1116M.

2.04 ADMIXTURES A. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight

of cement. B. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C260/C260M. C. Waterproofing Admixture: Admixture formulated to reduce permeability to liquid water, with no

adverse effect on concrete properties. 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout: Moisture-insensitive, two-part; consisting of epoxy resin, non-metallic aggregate, and activator. 1. Composition: High solids content material exhibiting positive expansion when tested in

accordance with ASTM C827/C827M. a. Maximum Height Change: Plus 4 percent. b. Minimum Height Change: Plus 1 percent.

2. Minimum Compressive Strength at 7 days, ASTM C579: 12,000 pounds per square inch. 2.06 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS

A. Epoxy Bonding System: 1. Complying with ASTM C881/C881M and of Type required for specific application.

B. Waterstops: Rubber, complying with COE CRD-C 513. C. Slab Isolation Joint Filler: 1/2 inch thick, height equal to slab thickness, with removable top

section that will form 1/2 inch deep sealant pocket after removal.

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20A615/A615M

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20A767/A767M

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20C150/C150M





http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20C579


http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=COE%20CRD-C%20513-74



D. Slab Construction Joint Devices: Combination keyed joint form and screed, galvanized steel, with rectangular or round knockout holes for conduit or rebar to pass through joint form at 6 inches on center; ribbed steel stakes for setting.

2.07 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Reducer: Liquid thin-film-forming compound that reduces rapid moisture loss

caused by high temperature, low humidity, and high winds; intended for application immediately after concrete placement.

B. Curing Compound, Naturally Dissipating: Clear, water-based, liquid membrane-forming compound; complying with ASTM C309. 1. Product dissipates within 4 to 6 weeks. 2. Provide product containing fugitive red dye.

C. Curing and Sealing Compound, Moisture Emission Reducing, Membrane-Forming: Liquid, membrane-forming, clear sealer, for application to newly-placed concrete; capable of providing adequate bond for flooring adhesives, initially and over the long term; with sufficient moisture vapor impermeability to prevent deterioration of flooring adhesives due to moisture emission. 1. Comply with ASTM C309 and ASTM C1315 Type I Class A. 2. VOC Content: Less than 100 g/L. 3. Solids Content: 25 percent, minimum.

D. Moisture-Retaining Sheet: ASTM C171. 1. Polyethylene film, white opaque, minimum nominal thickness of 8 mil..

E. Polyethylene Film: ASTM D2103, 4 mil, 0.004 inch thick, clear. F. Water: Potable, not detrimental to concrete.

2.08 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations. B. Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on the basis

of field experience or trial mixtures, as specified in ACI 301. 1. For trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to Architect for

preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. C. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates

recommended or required by manufacturer. D. Fiber Reinforcement: Add to mix at rate of 1.5 pounds per cubic yard, or as recommended by

manufacturer for specific project conditions. E. Structural Lightweight Concrete:

1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C39/C39M at 28 days: 3,000 pounds per square inch.

2. Water-Cement Ratio: Maximum 40 percent by weight. 3. Total Air Content: 3 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C173/C173M. 4. Maximum Slump: 3 inches. 5. Maximum Aggregate Size: 5/8 inch.

2.09 MIXING A. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C94/C94M. B. Adding Water: If concrete arrives on-site with slump less than suitable for placement, do not

add water that exceeds the maximum water-cement ratio or exceeds the maximum permissible slump.


A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section.





http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20D2103









3.02 PREPARATION A. Formwork: Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Design and fabricate forms to support all

applied loads until concrete is cured, and for easy removal without damage to concrete. B. Verify that forms are clean and free of rust before applying release agent. C. Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of

form accessories. D. Where new concrete is to be bonded to previously placed concrete, prepare existing surface by

cleaning and applying bonding agent in according to bonding agent manufacturer's instructions. 1. Use epoxy bonding system for bonding to damp surfaces, for structural load-bearing

applications, and where curing under humid conditions is required. E. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete,

insert steel dowels and pack solid with non-shrink grout. F. Interior Slabs on Grade: Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints

minimum 6 inches. Seal joints, seams and penetrations watertight with manufacturer's recommended products and follow manufacturer's written instructions. Repair damaged vapor retarder before covering. 1. Granular Fill Over Vapor Retarder: Cover vapor retarder with compactible granular fill as

indicated on drawings. Do not use sand. 3.03 INSTALLING REINFORCEMENT AND OTHER EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, and accurately position, support, and secure in place to achieve not less than minimum concrete coverage required for protection.

B. Install welded wire reinforcement in maximum possible lengths, and offset end laps in both directions. Splice laps with tie wire.

C. Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not interfere with concrete placement.

3.04 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R. B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1R. C. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and

test samples taken. D. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, waterstops, embedded parts, and formed construction joint

devices will not be disturbed during concrete placement. E. Place concrete continuously without construction (cold) joints wherever possible; where

construction joints are necessary, before next placement prepare joint surface by removing laitance and exposing the sand and sound surface mortar, by sandblasting or high-pressure water jetting.

F. Finish floors level and flat, unless otherwise indicated, within the tolerances specified below. 3.05 FLOOR FLATNESS AND LEVELNESS TOLERANCES

A. Correct the slab surface if tolerances are less than specified. B. Minimum F(F) Floor Flatness and F(L) Floor Levelness Values:

1. Exposed to View and Foot Traffic: F(F) of 20; F(L) of 15, on-grade only. 2. Under Raised Access Flooring: F(F) of 20; F(L) of 15, on-grade only. 3. Under Thick-Bed Tile: F(F) of 20; F(L) of 15, on-grade only. 4. Under Carpeting: F(F) of 25; F(L) of 20, on-grade only. 5. Under Thin Resilient Flooring and Thinset Tile: F(F) of 35; F(L) of 25, on-grade only. 6. Warehouse Floors On Grade: F(F) of ____; F(L) of ____.







C. Measure F(F) Floor Flatness and F(L) Floor Levelness in accordance with ASTM E1155 (ASTM E1155M), within 48 hours after slab installation; report both composite overall values and local values for each measured section.

D. Correct the slab surface if composite overall value is less than specified and if local value is less than two-thirds of specified value or less than F(F) 13/F(L) 10.

E. Correct defects by grinding or by removal and replacement of the defective work. Areas requiring corrective work will be identified. Re-measure corrected areas by the same process.

3.06 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork. B. Unexposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in

height. C. Exposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off and smooth fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or

more in height. Provide finish as follows: 1. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Wet concrete and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive,

not more than 24 hours after form removal. 2. Grout Cleaned Finish: Wet areas to be cleaned and apply grout mixture by brush or

spray; scrub immediately to remove excess grout. After drying, rub vigorously with clean burlap, and keep moist for 36 hours.

3. Cork Floated Finish: Immediately after form removal, apply grout with trowel or firm rubber float; compress grout with low-speed grinder, and apply final texture with cork float.

D. Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1R, and as follows: 1. Surfaces to Receive Thick Floor Coverings: "Wood float" as described in ACI 302.1R;

thick floor coverings include quarry tile, ceramic tile, and Portland cement terrazzo with full bed setting system.

2. Surfaces to Receive Thin Floor Coverings: "Steel trowel" as described in ACI 302.1R; thin floor coverings include carpeting, resilient flooring, seamless flooring, resinous matrix terrazzo, thin set quarry tile, and thin set ceramic tile.

3. Decorative Exposed Surfaces: Trowel as described in ACI 302.1R; use steel-reinforced plastic trowel blades instead of steel blades to avoid black-burnish marks; decorative exposed surfaces include surfaces to be stained or dyed, pigmented concrete, surfaces to receive liquid hardeners, surfaces to receive dry-shake hardeners, surfaces to be polished, and all other exposed slab surfaces.

4. Other Surfaces to Be Left Exposed: Trowel as described in ACI 302.1R, minimizing burnish marks and other appearance defects.

E. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains at 1:100 nominal.

3.07 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with requirements of ACI 308R. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from

premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period

necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete. C. Formed Surfaces: Cure by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period. D. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms:

1. Slabs and Floors To Receive Adhesive-Applied Flooring: Curing compounds and other surface coatings are usually considered unacceptable by flooring and adhesive manufacturers. If such materials must be used, either obtain the approval of the flooring and adhesive manufacturers prior to use or remove the surface coating after curing to flooring manufacturer's satisfaction.


http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20E1155M

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20E1155M









2. Initial Curing: Start as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry. Keep continuously moist for not less than three days by water ponding, water-saturated sand, water-fog spray, or saturated burlap. a. Spraying: Spray water over floor slab areas and maintain wet. b. Saturated Burlap: Saturate burlap-polyethylene and place burlap-side down over

floor slab areas, lapping ends and sides; maintain in place. 3. Final Curing: Begin after initial curing but before surface is dry.

3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01

4000 - Quality Requirements. B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm. C. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M, for each test, mold and cure three concrete

test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 100 cubic yards or less of each class of concrete placed.

D. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents.

E. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken, following procedures of ASTM C143/C143M.

3.09 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Defective Concrete: Concrete not complying with required lines, details, dimensions,

tolerances or specified requirements. B. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect. The cost of

additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified. 3.10 PROTECTION

A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected concrete floor surface until fully cured. END OF SECTION





04 2000 - 1 UNIT MASONRY

SECTION 04 2000 UNIT MASONRY


A. Concrete block. B. Mortar and grout. C. Reinforcement and anchorage. D. Flashings. E. Lintels. F. Accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Nailing strips built into masonry. B. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing control and expansion joints.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A951/A951M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire for Masonry Joint Reinforcement;

2016. B. ASTM C67/C67M - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay

Tile; 2018. C. ASTM C90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 2016. D. ASTM C91/C91M - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement; 2012. E. ASTM C216 - Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or

Shale); 2016. F. ASTM C476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry; 2010. G. ASTM C1314 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms; 2014. H. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; current edition.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data for masonry units, fabricated wire reinforcement, mortar, and

masonry accessories. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that masonry units meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with provisions of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA, except where exceeded by requirements of

Contract Documents. B. Fire Rated Assemblies: Comply with applicable code for UL (FRD) .

1.06 MOCK-UP A. Construct a masonry wall as a mock-up panel sized 4 feet long by 2 feet high; include mortar,

accessories, structural backup, and flashings (with lap joint, corner, and end dam) in mock-up. B. Locate where directed. C. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanical damage and

contamination by other materials.




http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20C91/91M




http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=UL%20FIRE%20RESISTANCE

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ACI%20530/530.1



PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows: 1. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 by 8 inches and nominal depths

as indicated on drawings for specific locations. 2. Special Shapes: Provide non-standard blocks configured for corners. 3. Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C90, normal weight.

a. Hollow block, as indicated. 4. Non-Loadbearing Units: ASTM C129.

a. Hollow block, as indicated. b. Lightweight.

2.02 GRANITE A. Manufacturers:

1. Structural Stone,LLC or approved equal B. Granite:

1. Type/Color: Cambrian Black 2. Thickness: 3” 3. Finish: polished

2.03 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91, Type N.

1. Color: Mapei/09 Gray B. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I; color as required to produce approved color

sample. 1. Not more than 0.60 percent alkali.

C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. D. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144. E. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404. F. Pigments for Colored Mortar: Pure, concentrated mineral pigments specifically intended for

mixing into mortar and complying with ASTM C979/C979M. 1. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

G. Water: Clean and potable. H. Accelerating Admixture: Nonchloride type for use in cold weather. I. Moisture-Resistant Admixture: Water repellent compound designed to reduce capillarity.

2.04 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Manufacturers:

1. Blok-Lok Limited: www.blok-lok.com/#sle. 2. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc; X-Seal Anchor: www.h-b.com/#sle. 3. WIRE-BOND; www.wirebond.com/#sle.

B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 40 (40,000 psi), deformed billet bars; galvanized.

C. Joint Reinforcement: Use ladder type joint reinforcement where vertical reinforcement is involved and truss type elsewhere, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: ASTM A951/A951M. 1. Type: Truss or ladder. 2. Material: ASTM A1064/A1064M steel wire, mill galvanized to ASTM A641/A641M, Class

3. 3. Size: 0.1483 inch side rods with 0.1483 inch cross rods; width as required to provide not

less than 5/8 inch of mortar coverage on each exposure.



http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20C91/91M










E. Multiple Wythe Joint Reinforcement: ASTM A951/A951M. 1. Type: Truss. 2. Material: ASTM A1064/A1064M steel wire, mill galvanized to ASTM A641/A641M, Class

3. 3. Size: 0.1483 inch side rods with 0.1483 inch cross rods; width as required to provide not

less than 5/8 inch of mortar coverage on each exposure. F. Strap Anchors: Bent steel shapes, 1-1/2 inch width, 0.105 inch thick, 24 inch length, with 1-1/2

inch long, 90 degree bend at each end to form a U or Z shape or with cross pins, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A153/A153M, Class B.

G. Flexible Anchors: 2-piece anchors that permit differential movement between masonry and building frame, sized to provide not less than 5/8 inch of mortar coverage from masonry face.

H. Two-Piece Wall Ties: Formed steel wire, 0.1875 inch thick, adjustable, eye and pintle type, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B, sized to provide not less than 5/8 inch of mortar coverage from masonry face and to allow vertical adjustment of up to 1-1/4 in.

I. Masonry Veneer Anchors: 2-piece anchors that permit differential movement between masonry veneer and structural backup, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. 1. Anchor plates: Not less than 0.075 inch thick, designed for fastening to structural backup

through sheathing by two fasteners; provide design with legs that penetrate sheathing and insulation to provide positive anchorage.

2. Wire ties: Manufacturer's standard shape, 0.1875 inch thick. 3. Vertical adjustment: Not less than 3-1/2 inches. 4. Seismic Feature: Provide lip, hook, or clip on end of wire ties to engage or enclose not

less than one continuous horizontal joint reinforcement wire of 0.1483 inch diameter. 2.05 FLASHINGS

A. EPDM Flashing: ASTM D4637/D4637M, Type I, 0.040 inch thick. B. Flashing Sealant/Adhesives: Silicone, polyurethane, or silyl-terminated polyether/polyurethane

or other type required or recommended by flashing manufacturer; type capable of adhering to type of flashing used.

2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Preformed Control Joints: Rubber material. Provide with corner and tee accessories, fused

joints. 1. Manufacturers:

a. Blok-Lok Limited: www.blok-lok.com/#sle. b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc : www.h-b.com/#sle. c. WIRE-BOND: www.wirebond.com/#sle.

B. Cavity Mortar Control: Semi-rigid polyethylene or polyester mesh panels, sized to thickness of wall cavity, and designed to prevent mortar droppings from clogging weeps and cavity vents and allow proper cavity drainage. 1. Full-Height Airspace Maintenance and Drainage Material: Mesh panels, fitted between

masonry ties. C. Building Paper: ASTM D226/D226M, Type I ("No.15") asphalt felt. D. Nailing Strips: Softwood lumber, preservative treated; as specified in Section 06 1000. E. Weeps:

1. Type: Preformed aluminum vents with sloping louvers. 2. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

F. Cavity Vents: 1. Type: Preformed aluminum vents with sloping louvers. 2. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

G. Drainage Fabric: Polyester or polypropylene mesh. 1. Manufacturers:


http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20D4637/D4637M

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20D226/D226M



a. Advanced Building Products, Inc.; Mortairvent: www.advancedbuildingproducts.com/#sle.

b. Mortar Net Solutions : www.mortarnet.com/#sle. c. York Manufacturing, Inc; Weep Armor Weep Vent Protection:

www.yorkmfg.com/#sle. . Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials.

2.07 LINTELS A. Precast Concrete Lintels: 4,000 psi strength at 28 days.

2.08 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXING A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C270, using the Proportion Specification.

1. Masonry below grade and in contact with earth: Type S. 2. Exterior, non-loadbearing masonry: Type N. 3. Interior, non-loadbearing masonry: Type O.

B. . New Mortar for Old Brick: Proportioned by volume only; not more than 20 percent of the total volume of Portland cement and lime combined shall be Portland cement. 1. Sand: Match original mortar as closely as possible in color, size, and texture, without use

of other additives. 2. Do not use modern additives unless permitted in writing by Architect. 3. Repointing Mortar: Use proportions from 1 part lime to 2 parts sand with no Portland

cement, up to 2 parts Portland cement to 3 parts lime to 6 parts sand. 4. White Portland Cement: Use for repointing mortar where Portland cement is permitted. 5. Use mortar within 30 minutes after final mixing; do not add more water after the initial mix

is prepared. Grout: ASTM C476; consistency required to fill completely volumes indicated for grouting; fine

grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension of 2 inches or less; coarse grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension greater than 2 inches.

D. Admixtures: Add to mixture at manufacturer's recommended rate and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; mix uniformly.

E. Mixing: Use mechanical batch mixer and comply with referenced standards. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry. B. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located. C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.

3.02 PREPARATION A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other sections. B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building

structure provides permanent bracing. 3.03 COLD AND HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS

A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 40 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.

B. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to maximum 90 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.

3.04 COURSING A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform

thickness.





1. Mortar Joints and coursing: Match existing. 3.05 PLACING AND BONDING

A. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other work.

B. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. C. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted. D. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses. E. Remove excess mortar with water repellent admixture promptly. Do not use acids,

sandblasting or high pressure cleaning methods. F. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must

be made, remove mortar and replace. G. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped

edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges. H. Cut mortar joints flush where wall tile is scheduled or resilient base is scheduled.

3.06 WEEPS/CAVITY VENTS A. Install weeps in veneer and cavity walls at 24 inches on center horizontally on top of through-

wall flashing above shelf angles and lintels and at bottom of walls. B. Install cavity vents in veneer and cavity walls at 24 inches on center horizontally below shelf

angles and lintels and near top of walls. 3.07 CAVITY MORTAR CONTROL

A. Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity air space or to plug weep/cavity vents. B. For cavity walls, build inner wythe ahead of outer wythe to accommodate accessories. C. Install cavity mortar diverter at base of cavity and at other flashing locations as recommended

by manufacturer to prevent mortar droppings from blocking weep/cavity vents. 3.08 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - GENERAL, A. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings or specified under specific wall type, install

horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches on center. A. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below

openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening. B. Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls. C. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. D. Reinforce joint corners and intersections with strap anchors 16 inches on center. E. Fasten anchors to structural framing and embed in masonry joints as masonry is laid. Unless

otherwise indicated on drawings or closer spacing is indicated under specific wall type, space anchors at maximum of 36 inches horizontally and 24 inches vertically.

3.09 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - SINGLE WYTHE MASONRY A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 8 inches (200 mm) on center. B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below

openings. Extend minimum 16 inches (400 mm) each side of opening. C. Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls. D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches (150 mm). E. Reinforce joint corners and intersections with strap anchors 16 inches on center.



3.10 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - MASONRY VENEER A. Masonry Back-Up: Embed anchors in masonry back-up to bond veneer at maximum 2-2/3 sq ft

of wall surface per anchor. Place additional anchors at perimeter of openings and ends of panels, so maximum spacing of anchors is 8 inches on center.

B. Stud Back-Up: Secure veneer anchors to stud framed back-up and embed into masonry veneer at maximum 2-2/3 sq ft of wall surface per anchor. Place additional anchors at perimeter of openings and ends of panels, so maximum spacing of anchors is 8 inches on center.

3.11 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES - CAVITY WALL MASONRY A. Reinforce joint corners and intersections with strap anchors 16 inches on center.

3.12 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES - MULTIPLE WYTHE UNIT MASONRY A. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of

dimensioned position. 3.13 MASONRY FLASHINGS

A. Whether or not specifically indicated, install masonry flashing to divert water to exterior at all locations where downward flow of water will be interrupted. 1. Extend flashings full width at such interruptions and at least 6 inches, minimum, into

adjacent masonry or turn up flashing ends at least 1 inch, minimum, to form watertight pan at non-masonry construction.

2. Remove or cover protrusions or sharp edges that could puncture flashings. 3. Seal lapped ends and penetrations of flashing before covering with mortar.

B. Extend metal flashings to within 1/2 inch of exterior face of masonry and adhere to top of stainless steel angled drip with hemmed edge.

C. Extend plastic, laminated, and EPDM flashings to within 1/4 inch of exterior face of masonry. D. Lap end joints of flashings at least 6 inches, minimum, and seal watertight with flashing

sealant/adhesive. 3.14 LINTELS

A. Install precast concrete lintels over openings. B. Install reinforced unit masonry lintels over openings where steel or precast concrete lintels are

not scheduled. 1. Openings to 42 inches: Place two, No. 3 reinforcing bars 1 inch from bottom web. 2. Openings from 42 inches to 78 inches: Place two, No. 5 reinforcing bars 1 inch from

bottom web. 3. Openings over 78 inches: Reinforce openings as detailed. 4. Do not splice reinforcing bars. 5. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch

of dimensioned position. 6. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. 7. Allow masonry lintels to attain specified strength before removing temporary supports.

C. Maintain minimum 8 inch inch bearing on each side of opening. 3.15 GROUTED COMPONENTS

A. Reinforce bond beams with 2, No. 4 bars, 1 inch from bottom web. B. Lap splices minimum 24 bar diameters. C. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of

dimensioned position. D. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. E. At bearing locations, fill masonry cores with grout for a minimum 12 inches either side of

opening.



3.16 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control or expansion joints. B. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints in

accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Size control joints as indicated on drawings; if not indicated, 3/4 inch wide and deep. D. Form expansion joint as detailed on drawings.

3.17 BUILT-IN WORK A. As work progresses, install built-in metal door frames and glazed frames and other items to be

built into the work and furnished under other sections. B. Install built-in items plumb, level, and true to line. C. Bed anchors of metal door frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with grout.

1. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches from framed openings. 3.18 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from Alignment of Columns and Pilasters: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16 inch. C. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 ft and 1/2 inch in 20 ft or more. D. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non-cumulative; 1/2 inch in two stories or

more. 3.19 CUTTING AND FITTING

A. Cut and fit for chases. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location.

B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired.

3.20 CLEANING A. Remove excess mortar and mortar droppings. B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. C. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.

3.21 PROTECTION A. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that

are subject to damage by construction activities. END OF SECTION

1961 RTA WSP 2020 REVISIONS 05 1200 - 1 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING DESIGN GROUP 3, LLC

SECTION 05 1200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING


A. Structural steel framing members, support members, suspension cables, sag rods, and struts. B. Base plates, shear stud connectors and expansion joint plates. C. Grouting under base plates.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Steel fabrications affecting structural steel work. B. Section 06 0573 - Wood Treatment: Field-applied termiticide and mildicide for wood.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AISC (MAN) - Steel Construction Manual; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.; 2011. B. AISC S303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges; American Institute of

Steel Construction, Inc.; 2005. C. AISC S348 - Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts; 2004. D. ASTM A1 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Tee Rails; 2000 (Reapproved 2010) E. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2012. F. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,

Welded and Seamless; 2012. G. ASTM A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold Finished; 2013. H. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron

and Steel Products; 2012. I. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware; 2009. J. ASTM A242/A242M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel; 2004

(Reapproved 2009). K. ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi

Minimum Tensile Strength; 2010. L. ASTM A325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa

Tensile Strength (Metric); 2013. M. ASTM A449 - Standard Specification for Hex Cap Screws, Bolts and Studs, Steel, Heat

Treated, 120/105/90 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength, General Use; 2010. N. ASTM A490 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat-Treated, 150 ksi

Minimum Tensile Strength; 2012. O. ASTM A490M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Steel Bolts, Classes 10.9 and 10.9.3,

for Structural Steel Joints (Metric); 2012. P. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon

Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2010a. Q. ASTM A501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel

Structural Tubing; 2007. R. ASTM A514/A514M - Standard Specification for High-Yield Strength, Quenched and Tempered

Alloy Steel Plate, Suitable for Welding; 2005 (Reapproved 2009). S. ASTM A529/A529M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Carbon-Manganese Steel of

Structural Quality; 2005 (Reapproved 2009).


T. ASTM A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts; 2007a. U. ASTM A563M - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts [Metric]; 2007. V. ASTM A572/A572M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-

Vanadium Structural Steel; 2012. W. ASTM A588/A588M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel with

50 ksi (345 MPa) Minimum Yield Point with Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance; 2010. X. ASTM A759 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Crane Rails; 2010. Y. ASTM A992/A992M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes; 2011. Z. ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon,

Structural, High-Strength Low Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable; 2013.

AA. ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability and Ultra-High Strength; 2013.

AB. ASTM C1007 - Standard Specification for Installation of Load Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs and Related Accessories; 2011a.

AC. ASTM C1107/C1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink); 2013.

AD. ASTM F1554 - Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength; 2007a.

AE. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; American Welding Society; 2012.

AF. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2010. AG. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004). AH. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for

Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004). AI. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, locations of structural members, openings, attachments, and fasteners.

2. Connections not detailed. 3. Indicate cambers and loads. 4. Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths.

B. Manufacturer's Mill Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. C. Mill Test Reports: Indicate structural strength, destructive test analysis and non-destructive test

analysis. D. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within

the previous 12 months. E. Fabricator's Qualification Statement: Provide documentation showing steel fabricator is

accredited under IAS AC172. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC "Steel Construction Manual." B. Comply with Section 10 of AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for

architecturally exposed structural steel. C. Maintain one copy of each document on site.


D. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 10 years of documented experience.

E. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified steel fabricator that is accredited by the International Accreditation Service (IAS) Fabricator Inspection Program for Structural Steel (AC172).

F. Erector: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years of documented experience.

G. Design connections not detailed on the drawings under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Steel Angles and Plates: ASTM A36/A36M. B. Steel Plates and Bars: ASTM A572/A572M, Grade 50 (345) high-strength, columbium-

vanadium steel. C. Hot-Formed Structural Tubing: ASTM A501, seamless or welded. D. Steel Plate: ASTM A514/A514M. E. Structural Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, ASTM A307, Grade A galvanized to ASTM A 153/A

153M, Class C. F. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. G. Grout: Non-shrink, non-metallic aggregate type, complying with ASTM C1107/C1107M and

capable of developing a minimum compressive strength of 7,000 psi at 28 days. H. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: Fabricator's standard, complying with VOC limitations of

authorities having jurisdiction. I. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: Fabricator's standard, complying with VOC

limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.02 FABRICATION

A. Shop fabricate to greatest extent possible. B. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. Grind exposed welds smooth. C. Fabricate connections for bolt, nut, and washer connectors. D. Develop required camber for members.

2.03 FINISH A. Prepare structural component surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP. B. Shop prime structural steel members. Do not prime surfaces that will be fireproofed, field

welded, in contact with concrete, or high strength bolted. C. Galvanize structural steel members to comply with ASTM A123/A123M. Provide minimum 1.7

oz/sq ft galvanized coating. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that conditions are appropriate for erection of structural steel and that the work may properly proceed.

3.02 ERECTION A. Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings

and Bridges". B. Allow for erection loads, and provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure in safe

condition, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing.


C. Field weld components and shear studs indicated on shop drawings. D. Use carbon steel bolts only for temporary bracing during construction, unless otherwise

specifically permitted on drawings. Install high-strength bolts in accordance with AISC "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts".

E. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Fabricator and Architect. F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in

contact with concrete. G. Grout solidly between column plates and bearing surfaces, complying with manufacturer's

instructions for nonshrink grout. Trowel grouted surfaces smooth, splaying neatly to 45 degrees.

3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. High-Strength Bolts: Provide testing and verification of field-bolted connections in accordance

with AISC "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts", testing at least 5 percent of bolts at each connection.

B. Welded Connections: Visually inspect all field-welded connections and test at least 10 percent of welds using one of the following: 1. Radiographic testing performed in accordance with ASTM E94. 2. Ultrasonic testing performed in accordance with ASTM E164. 3. Liquid penetrant inspection performed in accordance with ASTM E165. 4. Magnetic particle inspection performed in accordance with ASTM E709.

END OF SECTION

1961 RTA WSP 2020 REVISIONS 05 4000 - 1 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING DESIGN GROUP 3, LLC.

SECTION 05 4000 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Formed steel stud exterior wall and interior wall framing.

B. Exterior wall sheathing.

C. Water-resistive barrier over sheathing.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel framing.

B. Section 04 2000 – Unit Masonry: Veneer masonry supported by wall stud metal framing.

C. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and miscellaneous framing.

D. Section 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation: Insulation within framing members.

E. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Lightweight, non-load bearing metal stud framing.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. AISI SG02-1 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members; American Iron and Steel Institute; 2001 with 2004 supplement. (replaced SG-971)

B. ASTM C955 - Standard Specification for Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Panel Products and Metal Plaster Bases; 2011c.

C. ASTM C1177/C1177M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing; 2008.

D. ICC-ES AC38 - Acceptance Criteria for Water-Resistive Barriers; ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.; 2009.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate with work of other sections that is to be installed in or adjacent to the metal framing system, including but not limited to structural anchors, cladding anchors, utilities, insulation, and firestopping.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on factory-made framing connectors, showing compliance with requirements.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate component details, framed openings, bearing, anchorage, loading, welds, and type and location of fasteners, and accessories or items required of related work. 1. Indicate stud and ceiling joist layout. 2. Describe method for securing studs to tracks and for bolted framing connections. 3. Provide design engineer's stamp on shop drawings.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, conditions requiring special attention.


1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Designer Qualifications: Design framing system under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products specified in this section, and with minimum three years of documented experience.

C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five (5) years of experience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories: 1. Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems LLC; www.clarkdietrich.com. 2. Marino\Ware; www.marinoware.com. 3. The Steel Network, Inc.; www.SteelNetwork.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 FRAMING SYSTEM

A. Provide primary and secondary framing members, bridging, bracing, plates, gussets, clips, fittings, reinforcement, and fastenings as required to provide a complete framing system.

B. Design Criteria: Provide completed framing system having the following characteristics: 1. Design: Calculate structural characteristics of cold-formed steel framing members

according to AISI North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.

2. Structural Performance: Design, engineer, fabricate, and erect to withstand specified design loads for project conditions within required limits.

3. Design Loads: In accordance with applicable codes. 4. Live load deflection meeting the following, unless otherwise indicated:

A. Exterior Walls: Maximum horizontal deflection under wind load of 1/600 of span. 5. Able to tolerate movement of components without damage, failure of joint seals, undue

stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or cyclic day/night temperature ranges.

6. Able to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members, and clearances of intended openings.

C. Shop fabricate framing system to the greatest extent possible.

D. Deliver to site in largest practical sections.

2.03 FRAMING MATERIALS

A. Studs and Track: ASTM C955; studs formed to channel, "C" shape with punched web; U-shaped track in matching nominal width and compatible height. 1. Depth: As indicated on the drawings. 2. Gage: 20 GA. min. 3. Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M G90/Z275 coating. 4. Provide components fabricated from ASTM A1008/A1008M, Designation SS steel.

B. Framing Connectors: Factory-made formed steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M SS Grade 50, with G60/Z180 hot dipped galvanized coating and factory punched holes. 1. Structural Performance: Maintain load and movement capacity required by applicable

code, when evaluated in accordance with AISI North American Specification for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members; minimum 16 gage, 0.06 inch thickness.

2. Movement Connections: Provide mechanical anchorage devices that accommodate movement using slotted holes, screws and anti-friction bushings, while maintaining


structural performance of framing. Provide movement connections where indicated on drawings. a. Where continuous studs bypass elevated floor slab, connect stud to slab in manner

allowing vertical movement of slab without affecting studs; allow for minimum movement of 1/2 inch.

b. Where top of stud wall terminates below structural floor or roof, connect studs to structure in manner allowing vertical movement of slab without affecting studs; allow for minimum movement of 1/2 inch.

3. Provide non-movement connections for tie-down to foundation, floor-to-floor tie-down, roof-to-wall tie-down, joist hangers, gusset plates, and stiffeners.

2.04 WALL SHEATHING

A. Wall Sheathing: Plywood; PS 1, Grade C-D, Exposure I.

B. Wall Sheathing: Glass mat faced gypsum; ASTM C1177/C1177M, square long edges, 5/8 inch Type X fire-resistant.

2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Bracing, Furring, and Bridging: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered; finish to match framing components.

B. Plates, Gussets, and Clips: Formed Sheet Steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered; finish to match framing components.

C. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.

2.06 FASTENERS

A. Self-Drilling, Self-Tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts and Washers: Hot dip galvanized per ASTM A153/A153M.

B. Anchorage Devices: In conformance with AISI SG 02-1.

C. Welding: In conformance with AWS D1.1.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.

B. Verify field measurements and adjust installation as required.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF STUDS

A. Install components in accordance with manufacturers' instructions and ASTM C1007 requirements.

B. Align floor and ceiling tracks; locate to wall layout. Secure in place with fasteners at maximum 24 inches on center. Coordinate installation of sealant with floor and ceiling tracks.

C. Place studs at spacing indicated; not more than 2 inches from abutting walls and at each side of openings. Connect studs to tracks using clip and tie method.

D. Construct corners using minimum of three studs. Install double studs at wall openings, door and window jambs.

E. Coordinate placement of insulation in multiple stud spaces made inaccessible after erection.

F. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to align with wall stud spacing.

G. Provide deflection allowance in stud track, directly below horizontal building framing at non-load


bearing framing.

H. Attach cross studs to studs for attachment of fixtures anchored to walls.

I. Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items, and to prevent stud rotation.

J. Touch-up field welds and damaged primed surfaces with primer.

3.03 WALL SHEATHING

A. Wall Sheathing: Secure with long dimension perpendicular to wall studs, with ends over firm bearing and staggered, using self-tapping screws. 1. Use plywood or other acceptable structural panels at building corners, for not less than 96

inches, measured horizontally. 2. Provide steel diagonal bracing at corners as required. 3. Place water-resistive barrier horizontally over wall sheathing, weather lapping edges and

ends.

3.04 WEATHER BARRIER

A. Install in accordance with Manufacturer’s printed instructions.

3.05 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/8 inch.

B. Maximum Variation of any Member from Plane: 1/8 inch.

END OF SECTION


05 5000 - 1 METAL FABRICATIONS

SECTION 05 5000 METAL FABRICATIONS


A. Shop fabricated steel items. B. Prefabricated ladders and ship ladders. C. Downspout boots. D. Cast iron tree grates.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of metal fabrications in concrete. B. Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry: Placement of metal fabrications in masonry.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A14.3 - American National Standard for Ladders -- Fixed -- Safety Requirements; 2008. B. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014. C. ASTM F3125/F3125M - Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolts, Steel and

Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 120 ksi (830 MPa) and 150 ksi (1040 MPa) Minimum Tensile Strength, Inch and Metric Dimensions; 2015a.

D. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2015 (Errata 2016). E. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer/Metal Building Primer; 1999 (Ed. 2004). F. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; 1982 (Ed. 2004).

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size

and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. 1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net

weld lengths. C. Welders' Certificates: Submit certification for welders employed on the project, verifying AWS

qualification within the previous 12 months. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS - STEEL

A. Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M. B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A501/A501M hot-formed structural tubing. C. Plates: ASTM A283/A283M. D. Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish. E. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F3125/F3125M, Type 1, plain. F. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded. G. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities

having jurisdiction. H. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with

VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.02 MATERIALS - ALUMINUM

A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), 6063 alloy, T6 temper. B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M), 5052 alloy, H32 or H22 temper.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ANSI%20A14.3


https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20F3125/F3125M

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=AWS%20D1.1/D1.1M

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=SSPC-Paint%2015

http://www.sspc.org/sspc-sp-2-hand-tool-cleaning.html

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=AWS%20A2.4

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20F3125/F3125M

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=AWS%20D1.1/D1.1M

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20B221

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20B221M





C. Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes: ASTM B210 (ASTM B210M), 6063 alloy, T6 temper. D. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Stainless steel.

2.03 FABRICATION A. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. C. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt

tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. D. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related

components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise.

2.04 FABRICATED ITEMS A. Ledge Angles and Shelf Angles Not Attached to Structural Framing: For support of masonry;

prime paint finish. B. Lintels: As detailed; galvanized finish. C. Door Frames for Overhead Door Openings and Wall Openings: Channel sections; galvanized

finish. 2.05 PREFABRICATED LADDERS

A. Prefabricated Ladder: Welded metal unit complying with ANSI A14.3; factory fabricated to greatest degree practical and in the largest components possible. 1. Components: Manufacturer's standard rails, rungs, treads, handrails. returns, platforms

and safety devices complying with the requirements of the MATERIALS article of this section.

2. Materials: Aluminum; ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), 6063 alloy, T52 temper. 3. Finish: Powder coat; color to be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard

range. 4. Manufacturers:

a. Industrial Ladder & Scaffolding, Inc.;: www.anyladder.com/#sle. b. O'Keeffe's Inc; Model 500: www.okeeffes.com/#sle. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.06 FINISHES - STEEL A. Prime paint steel items.

1. Exceptions: Galvanize items to be embedded in concrete, items to be embedded in masonry.

2. Exceptions: Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete, where field welding is required, and items to be covered with sprayed fireproofing.

B. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC-SP2. C. Prime Painting: One coat. D. Galvanizing of Non-structural Items: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M

requirements. 2.07 FABRICATION TOLERANCES

A. Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements. B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch. C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch. D. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches. E. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches.








A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. 3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. B. Supply setting templates to the appropriate entities for steel items required to be cast into

concrete or embedded in masonry. 3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until

completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. C. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in

contact with concrete. 3.04 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. C. Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch.

END OF SECTION

1961 RTA WSP 2020 RENOVATIONS 05 7500 - 1 DECORATIVE METAL COLUMN COVERS THE ARCHITECTURAL GROUP, INC.

SECTION 05 7500 DECORATIVE METAL COLUMN COVERS

PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specifications Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY A. This section includes Stainless Steel Column Covers as shown on drawings.

1.30 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer’s Literature and Data:

1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical data and brochures for each type of column cover required.

B. Shop Drawings: 1. Shop drawings shall show dimensions, sizes, thickness, alloys, tempers, finishes, joining,

attachments, and relationship of adjoining work. C. Samples:

1. Samples shall include a 12”x12” piece of each type of metal and finish as specified. D. Certification:

1. Submit certificates from manufacturer attesting that products comply with specified requirements including finish as specified.

E. Qualification Data: 1. Firms specified in “Quality Assurance” Article must demonstrate their capabilities and

experience by including lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Firm with manufacturing and delivery capacity required for the project, shall have

successfully completed at least ten projects within the past five years, utilizing systems, materials and techniques as herein specified.

B. Fabricator must own and operate its own manufacturing facilities for all metal components. “Kit of Parts Systems” consisting of components from a variety of manufacturers will not be considered or accepted.

C. Manufacturer/Fabricator must own and operate its own Painting and Finishing facility to assure single source responsibility and quality control.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING All material shall be protected during fabrication, shipment, site storage and erection to prevent damage to the finished work from other trades. Store column covers inside a well-ventilated area, away from uncured concrete and masonry, and protected from weather, moisture, soiling, abrasion, extreme temperatures, and humidity.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER – BASIS OF DESIGN

A. Decorative Metal Column Covers shall be manufactured by Gordon, Inc., 5023 Hazel Jones Road, Bossier City, LA 71111, (800) 747-8954, Fax (800) 877-8746, www.gordon-inc.com, [email protected].

B. The listed manufacturer shall not be construed as closing specifications to other prospective manufacturers, but rather as establishing a level of quality in a metal system. Other systems may

http://www.gordon-inc.com/

mailto:[email protected]


be submitted for approval as provided for in the specification at least 10 working days prior to submission of bids. Companies desiring to submit a proposal shall submit all descriptive information of the system proposed including photographs and shop drawings of at least three projects similar in detail and scope.

2.2 MATERIALS A. Decorative Metal Column Covers shall be a complete system. All secondary posts, anchors, clips

and extrusions are to be provided as complete package of this work. No exposed fasteners for column covers are allowed.

B. General: Provide metals free from surface blemishes where exposed to view in finished unit. Surfaces exhibiting pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, or other imperfections on finished units are not acceptable. All metal shall be of the highest grade, commercial type.

C. Material shall be the following: 1. Stainless Steel Type 304 or 304L or 316 or 316L, complying with ASTM A240 (Polished #8,

Brushed #4, Polished #7), 18 gauge minimum 2.3 FABRICATION

A. Height of Covers shall be up to 10’-0” without horizontal joints. B. Column Covers shall have either a reveal vertical joint, as shown on the architectural drawings.

All other details including base and ceiling details shall be fabricated in accordance with the architectural drawings.

C. Column Covers shall be manufactured true to geometry as shown on plan view of the architectural drawings with manufacturing tolerances.

D. Column Covers shall be manufactured in round configuration. E. Diameter should be 18” for stainless steel. F. System:

1. Covers shall be fabricated with return flanges at the vertical joints for structural strength. 2. Connector clips shall be provided and factory attached to the column covers at specified

intervals to allow for complete accessibility without tools or exposed fasteners. A clearance of ¾” is required at the top for installation.

3. In those cases where access is restricted to authorized personnel, a locking method at the top will be provided.

4. All covers shall be removable, demountable, and re-usable without exposed fasteners. 2.4 FINISHES

A. General: Comply with NAAMM’s “Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products” for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes.

PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install Column Covers in accordance with manufacturer’s written installation instructions and shop drawings.

B. Column Covers shall be erected plumb, level, square, true to line, securely anchored, and in proper alignment and relationship to work of other trades. Exterior joints are to be sealed by installer with backer rods and sealant.

C. Column Covers shall be inspected before installation to be free from dents, scratches, and other defects.

3.2 CLEANING A. Removal of protective covering shall occur immediately after installation to prevent adhesive

transfer.


B. Clean all surfaces following installation. C. Maintenance per manufacturer’s finish maintenance instructions.

3.3 PROTECTION A. Protection of column covers from damage by other trades after installation to be provided by

general contractor.

END OF SECTION 05 7500


06 1000 - 1 ROUGH CARPENTRY

SECTION 06 1000 ROUGH CARPENTRY


A. Structural dimension lumber framing. B. Exposed timber structural framing. C. Non-structural dimension lumber framing. D. Rough opening framing for doors, windows, and roof openings. E. Sheathing. F. Subflooring. G. Underlayment. H. Roof-mounted curbs. I. Roofing nailers. J. Preservative treated wood materials. K. Fire retardant treated wood materials. L. Miscellaneous framing and sheathing. M. Communications and electrical room mounting boards. N. Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Setting anchors in concrete. B. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing: Prefabricated beams and columns for support of

wood framing. C. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Miscellaneous steel connectors and support angles for

wood framing. D. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum-based sheathing.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AWC (WFCM) - Wood Frame Construction Manual for One- and Two-Family Dwellings; 2015. B. ASTM C1177/C1177M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as

Sheathing; 2013. C. ASTM D3498 - Standard Specification for Adhesives for Field-Gluing Wood Structural Panels

(Plywood or Oriented Strand Board) to Wood Based Floor System Framing; 2018a. D. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2015a. E. ICC (IECC) - International Energy Conservation Code; 2012. F. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009. G. SPIB (GR) - Grading Rules; 2014.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide technical data on insulated sheathing, wood preservative materials, and

application instructions. C. Samples: For rough carpentry members that will be exposed to view, submit two samples, 6

inch by 6 inch in size illustrating wood grain, color, and general appearance.

http://awc.org/codes-standards/publications/wfcm-2015


https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20D3498

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20E84

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?&rid=Z06&mid=5280&item_s_key=00410248&item_key_date=841231&input_doc_number=I%20Code%20IECC&input_doc_title=

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=APA%20PS%201

http://www.spib.org/publications.shtml



1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent

deformation and to allow air circulation. B. Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Prevent exposure to precipitation during shipping, storage, or

installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies. 1. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no

grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the specified requirements.

2. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading service for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated.

B. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. 2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONS

A. Grading Agency: Western Wood Products Association; WWPA G-5. B. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. C. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19. D. Stud Framing (2 by 2 through 2 by 6 ):

1. Grade: No. 2. E. Joist, Rafter, and Small Beam Framing (2 by 6 through 4 by 16 ):

1. Grade: No. 2. F. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring:

1. Boards: Standard or No. 3. 2.03 EXPOSED DIMENSION LUMBER

A. Grading Agency: Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, Inc; SPIB (GR). B. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings. C. Surfacing: Rough (unfinished). D. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19.

2.04 CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Subfloor/Underlayment Combination: Any PS 2 type, rated Single Floor.

1. Bond Classification: Exterior. 2. Span Rating: 16. 3. Performance Category: 5/8 PERF CAT. 4. Edges: Tongue and groove.

B. Subfloor/Underlayment Combination: Oriented strand board wood structural panel; PS 2, rated Single Floor. 1. Bond Classification: Exterior. 2. Performance Category: 19/32 PERF CAT. 3. Span Rating: 16. 4. Edges: Tongue and groove. 5. Surface Finish: Fully sanded face. 6. Exposure Time: Sheathing will not delaminate or require sanding due to moisture

absorption from exposure to weather for up to 300 days. 7. Provide fastening guide on top panel surface with separate markings indicating fastener

spacing for 16 inches, 19.2 inches and 24 inches on center, respectively.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ALSC%20PS%2020

http://www.wwpa.org/

http://www.spib.org/publications.shtml

http://ts.nist.gov/ts/htdocs/210/sccg/vps.htm

http://ts.nist.gov/ts/htdocs/210/sccg/vps.htm



8. Manufacturers: a. Georgia-Pacific LLC; DryGuard Enhanced OSB Sub-Floor: www.buildgp.com/#sle. b. Weyerhaeuser Company: www.weyerhaeuser.com/#sle. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

C. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: PS 1 A-D plywood, or medium density fiberboard; 3/4 inch thick; flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

D. Other Applications: 1. Plywood Concealed From View But Located Within Exterior Enclosure: PS 1, C-C

Plugged or better, Exterior grade. 2. Plywood Exposed to View But Not Exposed to Weather: PS 1, A-D, or better.

2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors:

1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel complying with ASTM A153/A153M for high humidity and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere.

2. Drywall Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length three times thickness of sheathing.

3. Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry. B. Sill Gasket on Top of Foundation Wall: 1/4 inch thick, plate width, closed cell plastic foam from

continuous rolls. C. Sill Flashing: As specified in Section 07 6200. D. Construction Adhesives: Adhesives complying with ASTM C557 or ASTM D3498.

2.06 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System

for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. 1. Fire-Retardant Treated Wood: Mark each piece of wood with producer's stamp indicating

compliance with specified requirements. 2. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an

ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA standards.

B. Fire Retardant Treatment: 1. Manufacturers:

a. Koppers, Inc : www.koppersperformancechemicals.com/#sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

C. Preservative Treatment: 1. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA U1, Use Category

UC3B, Commodity Specification A using waterborne preservative. a. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. b. Treat lumber exposed to weather. c. Treat lumber in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing. d. Treat lumber in contact with masonry or concrete. e. Treat lumber less than 18 inches above grade. f. Treat lumber in other locations as indicated.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION

A. Where wood framing bears on cementitious foundations, install full width sill flashing continuous over top of foundation, lap ends of flashing minimum of 4 inches and seal.






https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20D3498

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=AWPA%20U1




3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Select material sizes to minimize waste. B. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately

after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants. 3.03 FRAMING INSTALLATION

A. Set structural members level, plumb, and true to line. Discard pieces with defects that would lower required strength or result in unacceptable appearance of exposed members.

B. Make provisions for temporary construction loads, and provide temporary bracing sufficient to maintain structure in true alignment and safe condition until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing.

C. Comply with member sizes, spacing, and configurations indicated, and fastener size and spacing indicated, but not less than required by applicable codes and AWC (WFCM) Wood Frame Construction Manual.

D. Install horizontal spanning members with crown edge up and not less than 1-1/2 inches of bearing at each end.

F. Frame wall openings with two or more studs at each jamb; support headers on cripple studs. 3.04 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.

B. In framed assemblies that have concealed spaces, provide solid wood fireblocking as required by applicable local code, to close concealed draft openings between floors and between top story and roof/attic space; other material acceptable to code authorities may be used in lieu of solid wood blocking.

C. In metal stud walls, provide continuous blocking around door and window openings for anchorage of frames, securely attached to stud framing.

D. In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall-mounted items, unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support is explicitly indicated.

E. Where ceiling-mounting is indicated, provide blocking and supplementary supports above ceiling, unless other method of support is explicitly indicated.

F. Provide the following specific non-structural framing and blocking: 1. Cabinets and shelf supports. 2. Wall brackets. 3. Handrails. 4. Grab bars. 5. Towel and bath accessories. 6. Wall-mounted door stops.

3.05 ROOF-RELATED CARPENTRY A. Coordinate installation of roofing carpentry with deck construction, framing of roof openings,

and roofing assembly installation. B. Provide wood curb at all roof openings except where prefabricated curbs are specified and

where specifically indicated otherwise. Form corners by alternating lapping side members. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS

A. Subflooring/Underlayment Combination: Glue and nail to framing; staples are not permitted. B. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Secure with screws to studs with

edges over firm bearing; space fasteners at maximum 24 inches on center on all edges and into studs in field of board. 1. Size and Location: As indicated on drawings.



3.07 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT A. Apply preservative treatment compatible with factory applied treatment at site-sawn cuts,

complying with manufacturer's instructions. B. Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members.

3.08 TOLERANCES A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum. B. Surface Flatness of Floor: 1/8 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet maximum. C. Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet

maximum. 3.09 CLEANING

A. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill. B. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system.

END OF SECTION


06 2000 - 1 FINISH CARPENTRY

SECTION 06 2000 FINISH CARPENTRY


A. Finish carpentry items. B. Wood door frames, glazed frames. C. Wood casings and moldings. D. Hardware and attachment accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking. B. Section 09 9123 - Interior Painting: Painting of finish carpentry items.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A208.1 - American National Standard for Particleboard; 2009. B. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2015a. C. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014. D. AWMAC (GIS) - Guarantee and Inspection Services Program; current edition at

www.awmac.com/gis.php. E. BHMA A156.9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; 2010. F. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; 2005. G. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data:

1. Provide manufacturer's product data, storage and handling instructions for factory-fabricated units.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, and accessories. 1. Scale of Drawings: 1-1/2 inch to 1 foot, minimum. 2. Provide the information required by AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS). 3. Include certification program label.

D. Samples: Submit two samples of wood trim 8 inch long. E. Certificate: Submit labels and certificates required by quality assurance and quality control

programs. F. Manufacturer's Instructions: Provide manufacturer's installation instructions for factory-

fabricated units. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience. 1. Accredited participant in the specified certification program prior to the commencement of

fabrication and throughout the duration of the project. B. Quality Certification:

1. Comply with AWMAC (GIS) woodwork association quality certification service/program in accordance with requirements for work specified in this section: www.awmac.com/#sle.

2. Provide designated labels on shop drawings as required by certification program.



http://www.awinet.org/

http://www.awmac.com/gis.php


http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NEMA%20LD%203




3. Provide designated labels on installed products as required by certification program. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect from moisture damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FINISH CARPENTRY ITEMS

A. Quality Standard: Premium Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS), unless noted otherwise.

B. Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide materials having fire and smoke properties as required by applicable code.

C. Interior Woodwork Items: 1. Moldings, Bases, Casings, and Miscellaneous Trim: Clear white pine; prepare for paint

finish. 2. Door, Glazed Light, and Pocket Door Frames: White birch; prepare for paint finish. 3. Window Sills: Clear fir; prepare for transparent finish. 4. Loose Shelving: Birch plywood; prepare for paint finish.

2.02 LUMBER MATERIALS A. Softwood Lumber: , maximum moisture content of 6 percent; with vertical grain, of quality

suitable for transparent finish. B. Hardwood Lumber:: maximum moisture content of 6 percent; with vertical grain, of quality

suitable for transparent finish. 2.03 SHEET MATERIALS

A. Softwood Plywood, Not Exposed to View: Any face species, medium density fiberboard core; PS 1 Grade A-B, glue type as recommended for application.

B. Softwood Plywood, Exposed to View: Face species as indicated, plain sawn, medium density fiberboard core; PS 1 Grade A-B, glue type as recommended for application.

C. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1; Composed of wood chips, sawdust, or flakes of medium density, made with waterproof resin binders; of grade to suit application; sanded faces.

2.04 PLASTIC LAMINATE MATERIALS A. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3, HGS.

1. Products: a. As indicated on Drawings b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Laminate Backing Sheet: NEMA LD 3, BKL; undecorated plastic laminate.. C. Laminate Adhesive: Type recommended by laminate manufacturer to suit application; not

containing formaldehyde or other volatile organic compounds. 2.05 FASTENINGS

A. Adhesive for Purposes Other Than Laminate Installation: Suitable for the purpose; not containing formaldehyde or other volatile organic compounds.

B. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. 2.06 ACCESSORIES

A. Adhesive: Type recommended by fabricator to suit application. B. Lumber for Shimming and Blocking: See Section 06 1000 ROUGH CARPENTRY. C. Plastic Edge Trim: Extruded flat shaped; smooth finish; self locking serrated tongue; of width to

match component thickness; color as selected. D. Cellular PVC Trim and Moldings: Extruded, expanded PVC; UV-resistant, heat-stabilized, and

rigid material; for exterior use only.





1. Density: 31 pounds per cubic foot, minimum. 2. Flame Spread: ASTM E84, 75, maximum.

E. Plain Glass: ASTM C1036 annealed float glass, clear, 6 mm thick minimum. F. Safety Glass: ASTM C1048, fully tempered; clear; 1/8 inch thick, minimum. G. Primer: Alkyd primer sealer. H. Wood Filler: Solvent base, tinted to match surface finish color.

2.07 HARDWARE A. Hardware: Comply with BHMA A156.9.

2.08 WOOD TREATMENT A. Factory-Treated Lumber: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for

pressure impregnated wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications.

B. Fire Retardant Treatment (FR-S Type): Chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing flame spread index of 25, maximum, and smoke developed index of 450, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

C. Provide identification on fire retardant treated material. D. Deliver fire retardant treated materials cut to required sizes. Minimize field cutting.

2.09 FABRICATION A. Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings. B. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with plastic trim. C. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting.

Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. D. Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit

corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arises. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs.

E. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse face of plastic laminate finished surfaces. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. B. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and

ready to receive this work. 3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install custom fabrications in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) requirements for grade indicated.

B. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level. C. Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use

additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps. 3.03 PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHING

A. Set exposed fasteners. Apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations. Sand work smooth. 3.04 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch.

END OF SECTION








06 6116 - 1 SOLID SURFACE FABRICATION

SECTION 06 6116

SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Section Includes: 1. Solid Surfacing Fabrications for indicated, including trim and material needed for a

complete installation: a. Circular Column Bases

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 9200 – Joint Sealants

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Reference Standards: In addition to requirements, comply with applicable provisions of

following for design, materials, fabrication, and installation of component parts: 1. ISSFA-2, “Classification and Standards Publication of Solid Surfacing Material”. 2. ASTM D570; Water Absorption of Plastics 3. ASTM D638; Tensile Properties of Plastics 4. ASTM D696; Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics 5. ATM D790; Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and

Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials 6. ASTM D2583; Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a Barcol Impresser. 7. ASTM E84; Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 8. ASTM F462; Standard Consumer Safety Specification for Slip-Resistant Bathing Facilities. 9. ASTM G21 “Fungal Resistance,” Method A, no growth. 10. ASTM G22 “Bacterial Resistance,” no growth. 11. Stain Resistance, ANSI Z124-6-5.2 1997.

1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design Load: Deflection limited to 1/360. B. Design items with sufficient strength for handling stresses. C. Accessible Design: Comply with ICC/ANSI A117.1

1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical literature indicating physical properties and performance

criteria for solid surfacing materials and related components. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate design parameters, adjacent construction, materials, dimensions,

thickness, fabrication details, tolerances, jointing methods, method of support, anchorages, integration with plumbing fixtures and connections, and colors.

C. Samples: Submit two (2) 12 inch by 12 inch samples representative of colors, patterns, textures, finishes and edge treatments and curve. Approved samples will be retained as a standard for the work.

D. Informational Submittals: Submit following packaged separately from other submittals: 1. Manufacturer's written installation instructions.



2. Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's recommended cleaning and maintenance procedures. Include in project closeout documents.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator/Installer Qualifications:

1. Company specializing in fabricating and installing solid surfacing fabrications similar in complexity to those required in this project, including specific requirements indicated.

2. Fabricator Qualifications: Minimum of three years documented experience in fabricating solid surfacing wall panels similar in scope and complexity of this Project, currently certified by the manufacturer as an acceptable fabricator.

3. Installer Qualifications: Minimum of three years documented installation experience for projects similar in scope and complexity to this Project, and currently certified by the manufacturer as an acceptable Installer. a. Installer shall be the fabricator.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain solid surfacing fabrications through one source. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide solid surfacing fabrications with the following

surface- burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL 723 or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

D. Pre-Installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with Division 01. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, handle, and protect materials in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. 1. Provide protective coverings of suitable material. Take special precautions at corners.

1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Shop Drawings.

1.09 SEQUENCING A. Sequence work to permit installation of adjacent affected construction.

1.10 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Provide manufacturer’s 10 year limited warranty covering replacement of the

material except for non-covered conditions as follows: 1. Minor stains, scratches, water spots, and burns that may be corrected by techniques

covered in the manufacturer’s Use and Care Guide. 2. Failure of solid surfacing joint material. 3. Use for purposes other than indoor finish material. See manufacturer’s warranty for

complete details. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Product and Manufacturer: 1. Avonite Surfaces 2. DuPont Corian 3. Formica Corporation 4. Nevamar 5. Wilsonart



2.02 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. Solid Surfacing Materials: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with

ISSFA- 2/KPA SS-1. 1. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Special Features: 1. Curved shape. 2. Beveled edge treatment.

C. Accessories: 1. Adhesives: For seams and drop edges, Solid Surfacing Seaming Cartridges, 9 ounce

(260ml); color to blend with sheet material as recommended by solid surface material manufacturer.

2. Provide matching inside corner, molding to protect and conceal corner sealant. 3. Panel Adhesive: Manufacturer recommended oxime based silicone adhesive. 4. Silicone Sealant: Mildew-resistant, FDA-compliant sealant recommended by

manufacturer, in color to match solid surface. 5. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Glues: Use installation adhesives that comply

with the limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.03 FABRICATION A. Assemble work at shop following manufacturer’s printed fabrication instructions and deliver

to job ready for installation. Manufacture in largest practical pieces for handling and shipping without seams. 1. Grade: AWI, Custom. 2. Fabricate work square and to required lines. 3. Recess and conceal fasteners, connections, and reinforcing. 4. Design construction and installation details to allow for expansion and contraction of

materials. Properly frames material with tight, hairline joints held rigidly in place. 5. Fabricate items to profiles shown with connections and supports as indicated or as required

for complete installation in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and approved submittals.

6. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended unsupported distances. 7. Finish exposed surfaces smooth and polish to low sheen. 8. Bevel edges per drawings

B. Curved Base: 2” thick, Solid Surfacing, adhesively joined with no exposed seams, edge details as indicated.


A. Examine substrates to place the curved solid surface material bases and conditions under which bases will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of bases.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written installation instructions and approved Submittals. Provide templates and rough-in measurements.



1. Set items plumb, level, rigid and solidly adhered to substrate. 2. Prefit items: Adjust supports to make fit. Align joints over support framing. 3. Apply dabs of silicone on supports; place items on supports and attach. 4. Cut and finish component edges with clean, sharp returns.

B. Tolerances: 1. Maximum Variation From True Dimension: 1/8 inch. 2. Maximum Offset From True Position: 1/8 inch. 3. Variation in Component Size: Plus/Minus 1/4 inch. 4. Location of Openings: Plus/Minus 1/4 inch from indicated location.

3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Cleaning:

1. Clean and polish fabrications in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Promptly remove excessive mastic and seam adhesive. 3. Clean curved bases in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Protection: 1. Do not permit construction near unprotected surfaces.

C. Refer to manufacturer’s warranty and exclusions. .

END OF SECTION


07 2100 - 1 THERMAL INSULATION

SECTION 07 2100 THERMAL INSULATION


A. Board insulation at cavity wall construction, perimeter foundation wall, underside of floor slabs, over roof deck, over roof sheathing, and exterior wall.

B. Batt insulation and vapor retarder in exterior wall, ceiling, and floor construction. C. Batt insulation for filling crevices in exterior wall and roof.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Field-applied termiticide for concrete slabs and

foundations. B. Section 05 4000 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Board insulation as wall sheathing. C. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Supporting construction for batt insulation. D. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping: Insulation as part of fire-rated through-penetration assemblies. E. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustic insulation inside walls and partitions.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation; 2015a. B. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light

Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2012. C. ASTM C1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal

Insulation Board; 2016. D. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2015a. E. ASTM E136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At

750 Degrees C; 2016. F. ASTM E2357 - Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier Assemblies;

2011. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 APPLICATIONS

A. Insulation at Perimeter of Foundation: Extruded polystyrene (XPS) board. B. Insulation Inside Masonry Cavity Walls: Polyisocyanurate board. C. Insulation Over Metal Stud Framed Walls, Continuous: Polyisocyanurate board. D. Insulation in Metal Framed Walls: Batt insulation with integral vapor retarder. E. Insulation in Wood Framed Walls: Batt insulation with separate vapor retarder. F. Insulation Above Lay-In Acoustical Ceilings: Batt insulation with no vapor retarder.

2.02 FOAM BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS A. Extruded Polystyrene (XPS) Board Insulation: Complies with ASTM C578 with either natural

skin or cut cell surfaces. 1. Type and Compressive Resistance: Type IV, 25 psi (173 kPa), minimum. 2. Flame Spread Index (FSI): Class A - 0 to 25, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Smoke Developed Index (SDI): 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 4. Type and Thermal Resistance, R-value: Type IV, 5.0 (0.88) per 1 inch thickness at 75

degrees F mean temperature. 5. Board Edges: Square.












6. Type and Water Absorption: Type IV, 0.3 percent by volume, maximum, by total immersion.

7. Manufacturers: a. Dow Chemical Company; STYROFOAM HIGHLOAD 40:

www.dowbuildingsolutions.com/#sle. b. Kingspan Insulation LLC; GreenGuard XPS Type IV, 25 psi:

www.kingspan.com/#sle. c. Owens Corning Corporation; FOAMULAR Extruded Polystyrene (XPS) Insulation:

www.ocbuildingspec.com/#sle. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Extruded Polystyrene (XPS) Continuous Insulation (CI) Board: Complies with ASTM C578, and manufactured using carbon black technology. 1. Type and Compressive Resistance: Type IV, 25 psi (173 kPa), minimum. 2. Flame Spread Index (FSI): Class A - 0 to 25, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Smoke Developed Index (SDI): 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 4. Type and Thermal Resistance, R-value: Type IV, 5.0 (0.88), minimum, per 1 inch

thickness at 75 degrees F mean temperature. 5. Type and Water Absorption: Type IV, 0.3 percent by volume, maximum, by total

immersion. 6. Manufacturers:

a. Dow Chemical Company; STYROFOAM Brand Ultra SL (Shiplap): www.dowbuildingsolutions.com/#sle.

b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. C. Polyisocyanurate (ISO) Board Insulation: Rigid cellular foam, complying with ASTM C1289.

1. Classifications: a. Type III: Faced with perlite insulation board on one major surface of core foam and

glass fiber reinforced cellulosic felt or uncoated or coated polymer-bonded glass fiber mat facer on other major surface of core foam. 1) Compressive Strength: 16 psi, minimum. 2) Thermal Resistance, R-value: At 1-1/2 inch thick; 7.0 at 75 degrees F.

2.03 BATT INSULATION MATERIALS A. Where batt insulation is indicated, either glass fiber or mineral fiber batt insulation may be used,

at Contractor's option. B. Glass Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665;

friction fit. 1. Flame Spread Index: 75 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E136, except for

facing, if any. 4. Facing: Aluminum foil, one side. 5. Manufacturers:

a. CertainTeed Corporation : www.certainteed.com/#sle. b. Johns Manville : www.jm.com/#sle. c. Owens Corning Corporation; EcoTouch PINK FIBERGLAS Insulation:

www.ocbuildingspec.com/#sle. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

C. Mineral Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible or semi-rigid preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665; friction fit; unfaced flame spread index of 0 (zero) when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Manufacturers:

a. Johns Manville; MinWool Sound Attenuation Fire Batts: www.jm.com/#sle.














b. Knauf Insulation; EcoBatt Insulation: www.knaufinsulation.com/#sle. c. ROCKWOOL (ROXUL, Inc); COMFORTBATT: www.rockwool.com/#sle. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: Black polyethylene film for above grade application, 10 mil, 0.010 inch

thick. B. Tape: Reinforced polyethylene film with acrylic pressure sensitive adhesive.

1. Application: Sealing of interior circular penetrations, such as pipes or cables. 2. Width: 3.9 inch.

C. Tape: Bright aluminum self-adhering type, mesh reinforced, 2 inch wide. D. Tape joints of rigid insulation in accordance with roofing and insulation manufacturers'

instructions. E. Insulation Fasteners: Impaling clip of unfinished steel with washer retainer and clips, to be

adhered to surface to receive insulation, length to suit insulation thickness and substrate, capable of securely and rigidly fastening insulation in place.

F. Wire Mesh: Galvanized steel, hexagonal wire mesh. G. Protection Board for Below Grade Insulation: Cementitious, 1/4 inch thick. H. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for application.


A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates are ready to receive insulation.

B. Verify substrate surfaces are flat, free of honeycomb, fins, irregularities, or materials or substances that may impede adhesive bond.

3.02 BOARD INSTALLATION AT CAVITY WALLS A. Install boards to fit snugly between wall ties. B. Install boards horizontally on walls. C. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane.

3.03 BATT INSTALLATION A. Install insulation and vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in exterior wall and roof spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation. C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids. D. Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services

within the plane of the insulation. E. Install with factory applied vapor retarder membrane facing warm side of building spaces. Lap

ends and side flanges of membrane over framing members. F. Staple or nail facing flanges in place at maximum 6 inches on center. G. Tape seal butt ends, lapped flanges, and tears or cuts in membrane. H. At wood framing, place vapor retarder on warm side of insulation by stapling at 6 inches on

center. Lap and seal sheet retarder joints over member face. I. At metal framing, place vapor retarder on warm side of insulation; lap and seal sheet retarder

joints over member face. J. Tape seal tears or cuts in vapor retarder. K. Extend vapor retarder tightly to full perimeter of adjacent window and door frames and other

items interrupting the plane of the membrane. Tape seal in place.



3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

3.05 PROTECTION A. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment.

END OF SECTION


07 6200 - 1 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

SECTION 07 6200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM


A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings, counterflashings, gutters, downspouts, and sheet metal roofing.

B. Sealants for joints within sheet metal fabrications. C. Precast concrete splash pads.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood nailers for sheet metal work. B. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing non-lap joints between sheet metal fabrications and adjacent

construction. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; 2014 (2015 Errata). B. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014. C. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate (Metric); 2014. D. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014. E. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; 2012.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section.

1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, flashings,

terminations, and installation details. C. Samples: Submit two samples 6 by 6 inch in size illustrating metal finish color.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA (ASMM) and CDA A4050 requirements and standard details,

except as otherwise indicated. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. C. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in sheet metal work with 5 years of

documented experience. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage.

B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Manufacturers: 1. Petersen Aluminum Corporation; : www.pac-clad.com/#sle. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 SHEET MATERIALS A. Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 24 gage,

(0.0239) inch thick base metal, shop pre-coated with PVDF coating.

http://www.aamanet.org/general.asp?sect=2&id=45




https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=SMACNA%20ARCHITECTURAL%20MANU




1. PVDF (Polyvinylidene Fluoride) Coating: Superior Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2605; multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system.

2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. B. Aluminum: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M); 20 gage, (0.032 inch) thick; anodized finish of color as selected.

1. Color Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A42/44 Class I integrally or electrolytically colored anodic coating not less than 0.7 mils thick.

C. Pre-Finished Aluminum: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M); 20 gage, (0.032 inch) thick; plain finish shop pre-coated with modified silicone coating. 1. Fluoropolymer Coating: High Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2604; multiple coat, thermally

cured fluoropolymer finish system. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.

2.03 FABRICATION A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. B. Form pieces in longest possible lengths. C. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners. D. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated; at moving joints, use sealed lapped,

bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams. E. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant. F. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch and hemmed to form drip. G. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches over roofing gravel. Return and brake edges.

2.04 GUTTER AND DOWNSPOUT FABRICATION A. Gutters: Profile as indicated. B. Downspouts: Rectangular profile. C. Gutters and Downspouts: Size for rainfall intensity determined by a storm occurrence of 1 in 10 years in

accordance with SMACNA (ASMM). D. Accessories: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts.

1. Anchorage Devices: In accordance with SMACNA (ASMM) requirements. 2. Gutter Supports: Brackets. 3. Downspout Supports: Brackets.

E. Splash Pads: Precast concrete type, of size and profiles indicated; minimum 3000 psi at 28 days, with minimum 5 percent air entrainment.

F. Downspout Boots: Cast iron. G. Downspout Extenders: Same material and finish as downspouts.

2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, with soft neoprene washers. B. Slip Sheet: Rosin sized building paper. C. Primer: Zinc chromate type. D. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc molybdate alkyd. E. Concealed Sealants: Non-curing butyl sealant. F. Exposed Sealants: ASTM C920; elastomeric sealant, with minimum movement capability as

recommended by manufacturer for substrates to be sealed; color to match adjacent material. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets in place, and nailing strips located.











B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. 3.02 PREPARATION

A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. B. Install surface mounted reglets true to lines and levels, and seal top of reglets with sealant. C. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15

mil. 3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Insert flashings into reglets to form tight fit; secure in place with lead wedges; pack remaining spaces with lead wool; seal flashings into reglets with sealant.

B. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners, and use exposed fasteners only where permitted.. C. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings. D. Fit flashings tight in place; make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to

profiles. E. Seal metal joints watertight. F. Secure gutters and downspouts in place with concealed fasteners. G. Slope gutters 1/4 inch per 10 feet, minimum. H. Connect downspouts to downspout boots, and grout connection watertight. I. Set splash pads under downspouts.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection will involve surveillance of work during installation to ascertain compliance with specified

requirements. END OF SECTION


07 8400 - 1 FIRESTOPPING

SECTION 07 8400 FIRESTOPPING


A. Firestopping of all joints and penetrations in fire resistance rated and smoke resistant assemblies, whether indicated on drawings or not, and other openings indicated.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum wallboard fireproofing.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials;

2016a. B. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops; 2013a. C. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; current edition. D. FM 4991 - Approval Standard for Firestop Contractors; 2013. E. FM (AG) - FM Approval Guide; current edition. F. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition. G. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; current edition.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Schedule of Firestopping: List each type of penetration, fire rating of the penetrated assembly,

and firestopping test or design number. C. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance ratings, and limitations. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation instructions. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. F. Installer Qualification: Submit qualification statements for installing mechanics.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs that provide the scheduled fire ratings

when tested in accordance with methods indicated. 1. Listing in UL (FRD) or FM (AG) will be considered as constituting an acceptable test

report. 2. Valid evaluation report published by ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICC-ES) at www.icc-

es.org will be considered as constituting an acceptable test report. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in

this section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and:

1. Trained by manufacturer. 2. Approved by Factory Mutual Research Corporation under FM 4991, or meeting any two of

the following requirements: 3. Verification of minimum three years documented experience installing work of this type. 4. Verification of at least five satisfactorily completed projects of comparable size and type. 5. Licensed by local authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ).

1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and conditions

during and after installation; maintain minimum temperature before, during, and for three days after installation of materials.



http://www.intertek-etlsemko.com/

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=FMAPPROVAL%204991

http://www.fmglobal.com/

http://www.aqmd.gov/home/regulations/rules/scaqmd-rule-book/regulation-xi


http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=FMAPPROVAL%204991


07 8400 - 2 FIRESTOPPING

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Firestopping Manufacturers: 1. 3M Fire Protection Products: www.3m.com/firestop/#sle. 2. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com/#sle. 3. Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing; TREMstop Acrylic:

www.tremcosealants.com/#sle. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 MATERIALS A. Firestopping Materials: Any materials meeting requirements. B. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: Provide products having VOC content lower than

that required by SCAQMD 1168. C. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Provide type of

materials as required for tested firestopping assembly. D. Fire Ratings: Refer to drawings for required systems and ratings.


A. Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other materials that could adversely affect bond of firestopping material.

B. Remove incompatible materials that could adversely affect bond. C. Install backing materials to prevent liquid material from leakage.

3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions, completely closing openings. B. Do not cover installed firestopping until inspected by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Install labeling required by code.

3.04 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.

3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.

END OF SECTION



07 9200 - 1 JOINT SEALANTS

SECTION 07 9200 JOINT SEALANTS


A. Nonsag gunnable joint sealants. B. Self-leveling pourable joint sealants. C. Joint backings and accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping: Firestopping sealants. B. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Sealing acoustical and sound-rated walls and

ceilings. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM C661 - Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Elastomeric-Type Sealants by Means of a Durometer; 2006 (Reapproved 2011).

B. ASTM C834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 2014. C. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014. D. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2016. E. ASTM C1330 - Standard Specification for Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold Liquid-

Applied Sealants; 2002 (Reapproved 2013). 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data for Sealants: Submit manufacturer's technical data sheets for each product to be

used, that includes the following. 1. Physical characteristics, including movement capability, VOC content, hardness, cure

time, and color availability. 2. Substrates that product is known to satisfactorily adhere to and with which it is compatible. 3. Substrates the product should not be used on. 4. Substrates for which use of primer is required. 5. Installation instructions, including precautions, limitations, and recommended backing

materials and tools. 6. Sample product warranty.

C. Product Data for Accessory Products: Submit manufacturer's technical data sheet for each product to be used, including physical characteristics, installation instructions, and recommended tools.

D. Color Cards for Selection: Where sealant color is not specified, submit manufacturer's color cards showing standard colors available for selection.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and with at

least three years of documented experience. B. Field Adhesion Tests of Joints: Test for adhesion using most appropriate method in

accordance with ASTM C1521, or other applicable method as recommended by manufacturer. 1.06 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories that fail to achieve

watertight seal , exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.










A. Non-Sag Sealants: Permits application in joints on vertical surfaces without sagging or slumping. 1. Adhesives Technology Corporation : www.atcepoxy.com/#sle. 2. Bostik Inc : www.bostik-us.com/#sle. 3. Dow Chemical Company : consumer.dow.com/en-us/industry/ind-building-

construction.html/#sle. 4. Hilti, Inc : www.us.hilti.com/#sle. 5. Pecora Corporation : www.pecora.com/#sle. 6. Sherwin-Williams Company : www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle. 7. Sika Corporation : www.usa-sika.com/#sle. 8. W.R. Meadows, Inc : www.wrmeadows.com/#sle. 9. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Self-Leveling Sealants: Pourable or self-leveling sealant that has sufficient flow to form a smooth, level surface when applied in a horizontal joint. 1. Adhesives Technology Corporation : www.atcepoxy.com/#sle. 2. Bostik Inc : www.bostik-us.com/#sle. 3. Dayton Superior Corporation : www.daytonsuperior.com/#sle. 4. Dow Chemical Company : consumer.dow.com/en-us/industry/ind-building-

construction.html/#sle. 5. Pecora Corporation : www.pecora.com/#sle. 6. Sherwin-Williams Company : www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle. 7. Sika Corporation : www.usa-sika.com/#sle. 8. W.R. Meadows, Inc : www.wrmeadows.com/#sle. 9. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 JOINT SEALANT APPLICATIONS A. Scope:

1. Do not seal the following types of joints. a. Intentional weepholes in masonry. b. Joints where sealant is specified to be provided by manufacturer of product to be

sealed. c. Joints where installation of sealant is specified in another section.

B. Exterior Joints: Use non-sag polyurethane sealant, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Type A - Lap Joints in Sheet Metal Fabrications: Butyl rubber, non-curing. 2. Type A - Lap Joints between Manufactured Metal Panels: Butyl rubber, non-curing. 3. Type G - Control and Expansion Joints in Concrete Paving: Self-leveling polyurethane

"traffic-grade" sealant. C. Interior Joints: Use non-sag Acrylic Latex sealant, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Type F - Wall and Ceiling Joints in Non-Wet Areas: Acrylic emulsion latex sealant. 2. Type G - Floor Joints in Wet Areas: Non-sag polyurethane "traffic-grade" sealant suitable

for continuous liquid immersion. 3. Type E - Joints between Fixtures in Wet Areas and Floors, Walls, and Ceilings: Mildew-

resistant silicone sealant; white. 4. Type F - In Sound-Rated Assemblies: Acrylic emulsion latex sealant. 5. Type G - Other Floor Joints: Self-leveling polyurethane "traffic-grade" sealant.

D. Interior Wet Areas: Bathrooms, restrooms, kitchens, food service areas, and food processing areas; fixtures in wet areas include plumbing fixtures, food service equipment, countertops, cabinets, and other similar items.

E. Sound-Rated Assemblies: Walls and ceilings identified as "STC-rated", "sound-rated", or "acoustical".



2.03 NONSAG JOINT SEALANTS A. Type A - Non-Staining Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M and A; not expected

to withstand continuous water immersion or traffic. 1. Non-Staining To Porous Stone: Non-staining to light-colored natural stone when tested in

accordance with ASTM C1248. 2. Hardness Range: 15 to 35, Shore A, when tested in accordance with ASTM C661. 3. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 65 to 180 degrees F. 5. Manufacturers:

a. Dow Chemical Company; DOWSIL 795 Silicone Building Sealant: consumer.dow.com/en-us/industry/ind-building-construction.html/#sle.

b. Sika Corporation; Sikasil 728NS: www.usa-sika.com/#sle. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Type G - Non-Sag "Traffic-Grade" Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M and A; single or multi-component; explicitly approved by manufacturer for continuous water immersion and traffic without the necessity to recess sealant below traffic surface. 1. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent, minimum. 2. Hardness Range: 40 to 50, Shore A, when tested in accordance with ASTM C661. 3. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to 180 degrees F.

C. Type D - Acrylic-Urethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M and A; single component; paintable; not expected to withstand continuous water immersion or traffic. 1. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 12-1/2 percent, minimum. 2. Hardness Range: 15 to 40, Shore A, when tested in accordance with ASTM C661. 3. Color: As selected from Manufacturer’s standard colors. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to 180 degrees F. 5. Manufacturers:

a. DAP Products Inc; DYNAFLEX 920 Sealant: www.dapspecline.com/#sle. b. Sherwin-Williams Company; Shermax Urethanized Elastomeric Sealant:

www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle. c. Top Gun, a brand of PPG Architectural Coatings; Top Gun 400:

www.ppgpaints.com/#sle. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

D. Type D - Acrylic Emulsion Latex: Water-based; ASTM C834, single component, non-staining, non-bleeding, non-sagging; not intended for exterior use. 1. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 2. Grade: ASTM C834; Grade - Minus 18 Degrees C. 3. Manufacturers:

a. Hilti, Inc; CP 506 Smoke and Acoustical Sealant: www.us.hilti.com/#sle. b. Sherwin-Williams Company; 950A Siliconized Acrylic Latex Caulk: www.sherwin-

williams.com/#sle. c. Specified Technologies Inc; Smoke N' Sound Acoustical Sealant:

www.stifirestop.com/#sle. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

E. Type C - Butyl Sealant: Solvent-based; ASTM C1311; single component, nonsag; not expected to withstand continuous water immersion or traffic. 1. Hardness Range: 10 to 30, Shore A, when tested in accordance with ASTM C661. 2. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 13 to 180 degrees F. 4. Manufacturers:

a. Sherwin-Williams Company; Storm Blaster All Season Sealant: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle.

b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.














2.04 SELF-LEVELING SEALANTS A. Type G - Self-Leveling Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade P, Uses M and A; single or

multi-component; explicitly approved by manufacturer for traffic exposure; not expected to withstand continuous water immersion . 1. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent, minimum. 2. Hardness Range: 35 to 55, Shore A, when tested in accordance with ASTM C661. 3. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to 180 degrees F. 5. Manufacturers:

a. Sherwin-Williams Company; Stampede 1SL Polyurethane Sealant: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle.

b. Sika Corporation; Sikaflex-1c SL: www.usa-sika.com/#sle. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Backer Rod: Cylindrical cellular foam rod with surface that sealant will not adhere to,

compatible with specific sealant used, and recommended by backing and sealant manufacturers for specific application. 1. Type for Joints Not Subject to Pedestrian or Vehicular Traffic: ASTM C1330; Type O -

Open Cell Polyurethane. 2. Closed Cell and Bi-Cellular: 25 to 33 percent larger in diameter than joint width.

B. Backing Tape: Self-adhesive polyethylene tape with surface that sealant will not adhere to and recommended by tape and sealant manufacturers for specific application.

C. Masking Tape: Self-adhesive, nonabsorbent, non-staining, removable without adhesive residue, and compatible with surfaces adjacent to joints and sealants.

D. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, type recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials.

E. Primers: Type recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application; non-staining. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that joints are ready to receive work. B. Verify that backing materials are compatible with sealants. C. Verify that backer rods are of the correct size.

3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant. B. Clean joints, and prime as necessary, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193.

3.03 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of

surfaces and material installation instructions. B. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve the following:

1. Width/depth ratio of 2:1. C. Install bond breaker backing tape where backer rod cannot be used. D. Do not install sealant when ambient temperature is outside manufacturer's recommended

temperature range, or will be outside that range during the entire curing period, unless manufacturer's approval is obtained and instructions are followed.

END OF SECTION






08 1113 - 1 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

SECTION 08 1113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES


A. Non-fire-rated hollow metal doors and frames. B. Hollow metal frames for wood doors. C. Fire-rated hollow metal doors and frames. D. Thermally insulated hollow metal doors with frames. E. Tornado-resistant hollow metal doors and frames.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware. B. Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Glass for doors and borrowed lites. C. Section 09 9123 - Interior Painting: Field painting.

1.03 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. ANSI: American National Standards Institute. B. NAAMM: National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers. C. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association. D. SDI: Steel Door Institute. E. UL: Underwriters Laboratories.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010. B. ANSI/SDI A250.8 - Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames (SDI-100); 2014. C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-

Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015. D. BHMA A156.115 - American National Standard for Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and

Steel Frames; 2014. E. FEMA P-361 - Safe Rooms for Tornadoes and Hurricanes: Guidance for Community and

Residential Safe Rooms; 2015. F. ICC 500 - ICC/NSSA Standard for the Design and Construction of Storm Shelters; National

Storm Shelter Association; 2014. G. ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; 2009. H. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2016. I. SDI 117 - Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; 2013. J. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com.J K. UL 10B - Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. L. UL 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition,

Including All Revisions. 1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations,

reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and one copy of referenced standards/guidelines.

http://www.ada.gov/




http://www.fema.gov/media-library/assets/documents/3140

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?&rid=Z06&mid=5280&item_s_key=00509783&item_key_date=851231&input_doc_number=ICC%20500&input_doc_title=

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?&rid=BSD&item_s_key=00006864&item_key_date=901231&input_doc_number=ICC&input_doc_title=

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NFPA%2080

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=SDI%20117

http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/index.html

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=UL%2010B

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=UL%2010C



C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and any indicated finish requirements.

D. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's published instructions, including any special installation instructions relating to this project.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with

at least three years of documented experience. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Comply with NAAMM HMMA 840 or ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100) in accordance with specified requirements.

B. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion and adverse effects on factory applied painted finish.


A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: 1. Ceco Door, an Assa Abloy Group company : www.assaabloydss.com/#sle. 2. Curries, an Assa Abloy Group company : www.assaabloydss.com/#sle. 3. Republic Doors, an Allegion brand : www.republicdoor.com/#sle. 4. Steelcraft: www.steelcraft.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Requirements for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames:

1. Steel Sheet: Comply with one or more of the following requirements; galvannealed steel complying with ASTM A653/A653M, cold-rolled steel complying with ASTM A1008/A1008M, or hot-rolled pickled and oiled (HRPO) steel complying with ASTM A1011/A1011M, commercial steel (CS) Type B, for each.

2. Accessibility: Comply with ICC A117.1 and ADA Standards. 3. Exterior Door Top Closures: Flush end closure channel, with top and door faces aligned. 4. Door Edge Profile: Manufacturers standard for application indicated. 5. Glazed Lights: Non-removable stops on non-secure side; sizes and configurations as

indicated on drawings. Style: Manufacturers standard. 6. Hardware Preparations, Selections and Locations: Comply with NAAMM HMMA 830 and

NAAMM HMMA 831 or BHMA A156.115 and ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100) in accordance with specified requirements.

7. Zinc Coating for Typical Interior and/or Exterior Locations: Provide metal components zinc-coated (galvanized) and/or zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) by the hot-dip process in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness, unless noted otherwise for specific hollow metal doors and frames. a. Based on SDI Standards: Provide at least A40/ZF120 (galvannealed) when

necessary, coating not required for typical interior door applications, and at least A60/ZF180 (galvannealed) for corrosive locations.

B. Hollow Metal Panels: Same construction, performance, and finish as doors. C. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more

than one type of requirement, comply with the specified requirements for each type; for instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirements conflict, comply with the most stringent.

2.03 HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. Door Finish: Factory primed and field finished. B. Exterior Doors: Thermally insulated.

http://www.naamm.org/








http://www.ada.gov/








1. Based on SDI Standards: ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100). a. Level 2 - Heavy-duty. b. Physical Performance Level B, 500,000 cycles; in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.4. c. Model 1 - Full Flush. d. Door Face Metal Thickness: 18 gage, 0.042 inch, minimum. e. Zinc Coating: A60/ZF180 galvannealed coating; ASTM A653/A653M.

2. Door Core Material: Manufacturers standard core material/construction and in compliance with requirements.

3. Door Thermal Resistance: R-Value of 2.5 minimum. 4. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inch, nominal. 5. Door Face Sheets: Flush.

C. Interior Doors, Non-Fire Rated: 1. Based on SDI Standards: ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100).

a. Level 2 - Heavy-duty. b. Physical Performance Level B, 500,000 cycles; in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.4. c. Model 1 - Full Flush. d. Door Face Metal Thickness: 18 gage, 0.042 inch, minimum.

2. Door Core Material: Manufacturers standard core material/construction and in compliance with requirements.

3. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inch, nominal. 4. Door Face Sheets: Flush.

D. Fire-Rated Doors: 1. Based on SDI Standards: ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100).

a. Level 2 - Heavy-duty. b. Physical Performance Level B, 500,000 cycles; in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.4. c. Model 1 - Full Flush. d. Door Face Metal Thickness: 18 gage, 0.042 inch, minimum.

2. Fire Rating: As indicated on drawings, tested in accordance with UL 10C and NFPA 252 ("positive pressure fire tests").

3. Temperature-Rise Rating (TRR) Across Door Thickness: In accordance with local building code and authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Provide units listed and labeled by UL (DIR). a. Attach fire rating label to each fire rated unit.

5. Door Core Material: Manufacturers standard core material/construction in compliance with requirements.

6. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inch, nominal. 7. Door Face Sheets: Flush.

E. Tornado-Resistant Doors: 1. Design and size door and frame components to withstand the specified load requirements

without damage or permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E330/E330M. a. Design Wind Loads: Comply with requirements of applicable code. b. Wind-Borne Debris Resistance: Door and frame components shall have FLA (PAD)

approval, Miami (APD) approval, or UL (DIR) approval for Large and Small Missile impact and pressure cycling at design wind loads.

2. Tornado Shelter Application: Comply with ICC 500 standard. a. Commercial: Designed and tested to comply with FEMA P-361 community shelter

door assembly guidelines. 2.04 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

A. Comply with standards and/or custom guidelines as indicated for corresponding door in accordance with applicable door frame requirements.

B. Frame Finish: Factory primed and field finished. C. Exterior Door Frames: Full profile/continuously welded type.








http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20E330/E330M

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?&rid=Z06&mid=5280&item_s_key=00509783&item_key_date=851231&input_doc_number=ICC%20500&input_doc_title=

http://www.fema.gov/media-library/assets/documents/3140



1. Galvanizing: Components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with A40/ZF120 coating.

2. Frame Metal Thickness: 16 gage, 0.053 inch, minimum. 3. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 7100.

D. Interior Door Frames, Non-Fire Rated: Full profile/continuously welded type. 1. Frame Metal Thickness: 18 gage, 0.042 inch, minimum.

E. Door Frames, Fire-Rated: Full profile/continuously welded type. 1. Fire Rating: Same as door, labeled. 2. Frame Metal Thickness: 18 gage, 0.042 inch, minimum.

F. Tornado-Resistant Door Frames: With same tornado resistance as door; face welded or full profile/continuously welded construction, ground smooth, fully prepared and reinforced for hardware installation. 1. Frame Metal Thickness: 16 gage, 0.053 inch, minimum.

G. Frames for Wood Doors: Comply with frame requirements in accordance with corresponding door.

H. Borrowed Lites Glazing Frames: Construction and face dimensions to match door frames, and as indicated on drawings.

I. Frames in Masonry Walls: Size to suit masonry coursing with head member 4 inch high to fill opening without cutting masonry units.

J. Frames Wider than 48 inches: Reinforce with steel channel fitted tightly into frame head, flush with top.

2.05 FINISHES A. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard. B. Bituminous Coating: Asphalt emulsion or other high-build, water-resistant, resilient coating.

2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Louvers: Roll formed steel with overlapping frame; finish same as door components; factory-

installed. 1. In Fire-Rated Doors: UL (DIR) or ITS (DIR) listed fusible link louver, same rating as door. 2. Style: Sightproof inverted Y blade. 3. Louver Free Area: 50 percent. 4. Fasteners: Concealed fasteners.

B. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 8000, factory installed. C. Astragals for Double Doors:

1. Exterior Doors: Steel, Z-shaped. 2. Fire-Rated Doors: Steel, shape as required for fire rating.

D. Grout for Frames: Portland cement grout with maximum 4 inch slump for hand troweling; thinner pumpable grout is prohibited.

E. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; provide three on strike side of single door, three on center mullion of pairs, and two on head of pairs without center mullions.

F. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for factory- or shop-assembled frames. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. C. Verify that finished walls are in plane to ensure proper door alignment.





3.02 PREPARATION A. Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted, with bituminous coating, prior

to installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and related requirements of specified door and frame standards or custom guidelines indicated.

B. Install fire rated units in accordance with NFPA 80. C. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction. D. Grout frames in masonry construction, using hand trowel methods; brace frames so that

pressure of grout before setting will not deform frames. E. Install door hardware as specified in Section 08 7100. F. Comply with glazing installation requirements of Section 08 8000. G. Coordinate installation of electrical connections to electrical hardware items. H. Touch up damaged factory finishes.

3.04 TOLERANCES A. Clearances Between Door and Frame: Comply with related requirements of specified frame

standards or custom guidelines indicated in accordance with SDI 117 or NAAMM HMMA 861. B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner.

3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.

3.06 SCHEDULE A. Refer to OPENING Schedule on the drawings.

END OF SECTION


https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=SDI%20117



08 3313 - 1 COILING COUNTER DOORS

SECTION 08 3313 COILING COUNTER DOORS


A. Non-fire-rated coiling counter doors and operating hardware. B. Fire-rated coiling counter doors and operating hardware. C. Electric motor operation; wiring from electric circuit disconnect to operator to control station.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Rough openings. B. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between frames and adjacent construction. C. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Rough openings. D. Section 09 9123 - Interior Painting: Field paint finish.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-

Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015. B. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; current edition. C. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; 2014. D. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2016. E. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's standard literature showing materials and details of

construction and finish. Include data on electrical operation. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate rough and actual opening dimensions, anchorage methods, hardware

locations, and installation details. C. Samples: Submit two slats, 4 inch long, illustrating shape, color and finish texture. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation sequence and installation, adjustment, and

alignment procedures. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Indicate modes of operation, lubrication requirements and

frequency, and periodic adjustments required. F. Project Record Documents: Include as-built electrical diagrams for electrical operation and

connection to fire alarm system. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL (DIR) as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.


A. Coiling Counter Doors: 1. C.H.I. Overhead Doors; Model 6522 (steel): www.chiohd.com/#sle. 2. Raynor Garage Doors; ____: www.raynor.com/#sle. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Coiling Counter Fire Doors: 1. C.H.I. Overhead Doors; Model 7522 (steel): www.chiohd.com/#sle. 2. Raynor Garage Doors; ____: www.raynor.com/#sle. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.



http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NEMA%20MG%201





2.02 COILING COUNTER DOORS A. Coiling Counter Doors, Non-Fire-Rated: Stainless steel slat curtain.

1. Mounting: Between jambs, within prepared opening. 2. Provide integral frame and sill of same material and finish. 3. Nominal Slat Size: 1-1/4 inches wide. 4. Slat Profile: Flat. 5. Finish, Stainless Steel: No. 4 - Brushed. 6. Guides: Formed track; same material and finish unless otherwise indicated. 7. Hood Enclosure: Manufacturer's standard; primed steel. 8. Manual hand chain lift operation. 9. Locking Devices: Lock and latch handle on outside.

B. Coiling Counter Doors, Fire-Rated: Galvanized steel slat curtain. 1. Mounting: Between jambs, within prepared opening. 2. Fire Rating: As indicated on the drawings; comply with NFPA 80.

a. Provide product listed and labeled by ITS (DIR) or UL (DIR) as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

3. Nominal Slat Size: 1-1/4 inches wide. 4. Slat Profile: Flat. 5. Finish, Galvanized Steel: Factory baked enamel. 6. Guides: Formed track; same material and finish unless otherwise indicated. 7. Hood Enclosure: Manufacturer's standard; primed steel. 8. Coiling Door Release Mechanism: Fusible link activated with automatically governed

closing speed. 9. Manual hand chain lift operation.

2.03 MATERIALS A. Curtain Construction: Interlocking, single thickness slats.

1. Slat Ends: Alternate slats fitted with end locks to act as wearing surface in guides and to prevent lateral movement.

2. Curtain Bottom: Fitted with angles to provide reinforcement and positive contact in closed position.

3. Steel Slats: ASTM A653/A653M galvanized steel sheet, with minimum G90/Z275 coating; minimum thickness 16 gage, 0.06 inch.

4. Stainless Steel Slats: ASTM A666, Type 304; minimum thickness 22 gage, 0.03 inch. B. Guide Construction: Continuous, of profile to retain door in place, with mounting brackets of

same metal. 1. Stainless Steel Guides: ASTM A666, Type 304, rollable temper.

C. Lock Hardware: 1. Latchset Lock Cylinders: Standard mortise cylinder type; keyed differently.

a. Keying: Master keyed. 2. For motor operated units, additional lock or latching mechanisms are not required. 3. Latching Mechanism: Inside mounted, adjustable keeper, spring activated latch bar

feature to keep in locked or retracted position. 4. Latch Handle: Manufacturer's standard.

D. Roller Shaft Counterbalance: Steel pipe and torsion steel spring system, capable of producing torque sufficient to ensure smooth operation of curtain from any position and capable of holding position at mid-travel; with adjustable spring tension; requiring 25 lb nominal force to operate.

2.04 ELECTRIC OPERATION A. Operator, Controls, Actuators, and Safeties: Listed and classified by ITS (DIR), UL (DIR), or

testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ) as suitable for purpose specified and indicated. 1. Provide interlock switches on motor operated units.



http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20A666



B. Electric Operators: 1. Motor Enclosure: NEMA MG 1. 2. Motor Rating: As recommended by manufacturer; continuous duty. 3. Manual override in case of power failure.

C. Control Station: Standard three button (OPEN-STOP-CLOSE) momentary control for each electrical operator. 1. Controls: 115 VAC circuit. 2. Recessed.

D. Safety Edge: Located at bottom of curtain, full width, electro-mechanical sensitized type, wired to stop operator upon striking object, hollow neoprene covered.


A. Verify that opening sizes, tolerances and conditions are acceptable. 3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install fire-rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80. C. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing

without distortion or stress. D. Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. E. Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation. F. Complete wiring from disconnect to unit components. G. Complete wiring from fire alarm system . H. Install perimeter trim as indicated.

3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/16 inch. C. Maximum Variation From Level: 1/16 inch. D. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch per 10 ft straight edge.

3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation.

3.05 CLEANING A. Clean installed components. B. Remove labels and visible markings.

END OF SECTION




08 3613 - 1 SECTIONAL DOORS

SECTION 08 3613 SECTIONAL DOORS


A. Overhead sectional door electrically operated. B. Operating hardware and supports. C. Electrical controls.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Steel channel opening frame. B. Section 09 9113 - Exterior Painting: Finish painting. D. Section 26 0500 - Wiring Connections.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014. B. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011. C. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior

Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen; 2004 (Reapproved 2012).

D. DASMA 102 - American National Standard Specifications for Sectional Overhead Type Doors; 2011.

E. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; current edition. F. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems Controllers, Contactors and Overload Relays

Rated 600 Volts; 2000 (R2005), with errata, 2008. G. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; 2014. H. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2014. I. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. J. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com. K. UL 325 - Standard for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems;

Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions and required tolerances, connection details,

anchorage spacing, hardware locations, and installation details. C. Product Data: Show component construction, anchorage method, and hardware. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include any special procedures required by project

conditions. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of type specified and with at least three years documented experience.

B. Comply with applicable code for motor and motor control requirements. 1.06 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals for warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.




http://www.dasma.com/


http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NEMA%20ICS%202


http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NEMA%20250



http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=UL%20325




A. Basis of Design: Model 3220 manufactured by Clopay Building Products www.clopaydoor.com/#sle. [STEEL]

B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers - Sectional Doors: 1. Raynor Garage Doors : www.raynor.com/#sle. 2. Wayne-Dalton, a Division of Overhead Door Corporation : www.wayne-dalton.com/#sle.

2.02 ALUMINUM DOORS A. Aluminum Doors: Flush aluminum, insulated; standard lift operating style with track and

hardware; complying with DASMA 102, Commercial application. 1. Performance: Withstand positive and negative wind loads equal to 1.5 times design wind

loads specified by local code without damage or permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E330/E330M, using 10 second duration of maximum load.

2. Door Nominal Thickness: 2 inches thick. 3. Thermal Transmittance: U-factor of 0.31 Btu/hr sq ft degrees F, maximum, in accordance

with DASMA 102. 4. Air Leakage Rate: Less than 0.40 cfm/sf when tested in accordance with ASTM E283 at

test pressure difference of 1.57 psf. 5. Finish: Factory finished with acrylic baked enamel; _____ color. 6. Glazed Lights: Full panel width, one row; set in place with resilient glazing channel. 7. Manual Operation: Pull rope. 8. Electric Operation: Electric control station.

B. Door Panels: Paneled aluminum construction; extruded aluminum stiles and rails, infill panels of sheet aluminum; stile and rail joints welded; rabbeted weather joints at meeting rails.

C. Window Frame: Manufacturers standard, finish to match. D. Glazing: Annealed float glass; single pane; clear; 1/8 inch thick.

2.03 COMPONENTS A. Track: Rolled galvanized steel, 0.090 inch minimum thickness; 2 inch wide, continuous one

piece per side; galvanized steel mounting brackets 1/4 inch thick. B. Hinge and Roller Assemblies: Heavy duty hinges and adjustable roller holders of galvanized

steel; floating hardened steel bearing rollers, located at top and bottom of each panel, each side.

C. Lift Mechanism: Torsion spring on cross head shaft, with braided galvanized steel lifting cables. 1. For Manual Operation: Requiring maximum exertion of 25 lbs force to open.

D. Sill Weatherstripping: Resilient hollow rubber strip, one piece; fitted to bottom of door panel, full length contact.

E. Jamb Weatherstripping: Roll formed steel section full height of jamb, fitted with resilient weatherstripping, placed in moderate contact with door panels.

F. Head Weatherstripping: EPDM rubber seal, one piece full length. G Panel Joint Weatherstripping: Neoprene foam seal, one piece full length. H. Lock: Inside center mounted, adjustable keeper, spring activated latch bar with feature to

retain in locked or retracted position; interior and exterior handle. I. Lock Cylinders: Keyed to Owner’s maser key system.

2.04 MATERIALS A. Lumber: Softwood species; kiln dried, preservative treated. B. Plywood: Softwood plywood with veneer core, waterproof glue, 1/4 inch thick.

http://www.clopaydoor.com/#sle

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20E330/E330M

http://www.dasma.com/




C. Sheet Steel: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, with G60/Z180 coating, plain surface.

D. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M), 5005 alloy, H14 temper, plain surface. E. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), 6063 alloy, T6 temper. F. Float Glass: Provide float glass glazing, unless noted otherwise.

1. Annealed Type: ASTM C1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing select).

G. Insulation: Foamed-in-place polyurethane, bonded to facing. 1. R-value of 9.1 minimum.

H. Metal Primer Paint: Zinc molybdate type. I. Wood Primer Paint: Exterior alkyd type.

2.05 ELECTRIC OPERATION A. Operator, Controls, Actuators, and Safeties: Comply with UL 325; provide products listed by

ITS (DIR), UL (DIR), or testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide interlock switches on motor operated units.

B. Electric Operators: 1. Mounting: Side mounted on cross head shaft. 2. Motor Enclosure:

a. Exterior Doors: NEMA MG 1, Type 4; open drip proof. 3. Motor Rating: 3/4 hp; continuous duty. 4. Motor Voltage: 120 volts, single phase, 60 Hz. 5. Motor Controller: NEMA ICS 2, full voltage, reversing magnetic motor starter. 6. Controller Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1. 7. Opening Speed: 12 inches per second. 8. Brake: Adjustable friction clutch type, activated by motor controller. 9. Manual override in case of power failure. 10. Refer to Section 26 0583 for electrical connections.

C. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated; enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to comply with NFPA 70.

D. Control Station: Provide standard three button (Open-Close-Stop) momentary-contact control device for each operator complying with UL 325. 1. 24 volt circuit. 2. Surface mounted, at interior door jamb. 3. Entrapment Protection Devices: Provide sensing devices and safety mechanisms

complying with UL 325. a. Primary Device: Provide electric sensing edge, wireless sensing, NEMA 1 photo eye

sensors, or NEMA 4X photo eye sensors as required with momentary-contact control device.

E. Safety Edge: Located at bottom of sectional door panel, full width; electro-mechanical sensitized type, wired to stop and reverse door direction upon striking object; hollow neoprene covered to provide weatherstrip seal.


A. Verify that wall openings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions and tolerances are within specified limits.

B. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics. 3.02 PREPARATION

A. Prepare opening to permit correct installation of door unit to perimeter air and vapor barrier seal.









http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NEMA%20ICS%202

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NEMA%20250






B. Apply primer to wood frame. 3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install door unit assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Anchor assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress. C. Securely brace door tracks suspended from structure. Secure tracks to structural members

only. D. Fit and align door assembly including hardware. E. Coordinate installation of electrical service. Complete power and control wiring from disconnect

to unit components. F. Install perimeter trim.

3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Variation from Level: 1/16 inch. C. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch from 10 ft straight edge. D. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work.

3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust door assembly for smooth operation and full contact with weatherstripping.

3.06 CLEANING A. Clean doors and frames and glazing. B. Remove temporary labels and visible markings.

3.07 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage until Date of Substantial Completion. B. Do not permit construction traffic through overhead door openings after adjustment and

cleaning. END OF SECTION

1961 RTA WSP 2020 REVISIONS 08-4113 - 1 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES DESIGN GROUP 3, LLC.

SECTION 08 4113 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish and install aluminum entrance, entrance door frames complete with hardware, and related components as shown on the drawings and specified in this section.

B. All doors shall be Medium Stile Entrance Doors as manufactured by the following or approved equal: 1. EFCO Series D300 2. Oldcastle MS-375

C. Glass and Glazing 1. All units shall be factory glazed. Refer to Section 08 8000 for Glass and Glazing Selections.

1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01 2300 – Alternates B. Section 08 4413 – Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls C. Section 08 8000 – Glazing D. Section 10 7113 – Exterior Sun Control Devices

1.03 ITEMS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED A. Structural support of the framing, wood framing, structural steel, and final cleaning.

1.04 LABORATORY TESTING AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Test Units

1. Air test unit shall be minimum size of 36" (914 mm) x 84" (2134 mm). B. Test Procedures and Performances

1. Entrance doors shall conform to all requirements for the door type referenced in 1.01.B. In addition, the following specific performance requirements shall be met.

2. Air Infiltration Test a. With door sash closed and locked, test unit in accordance with ASTM E 283 at a static air

pressure difference of 1.57 psf (75 Pa). b. Air infiltration shall not exceed .50 cfm/SF (2.54 l/s•m²) of unit, for single doors.

C. Project Wind Loads 1. The system shall be designed to withstand the following loads normal to the plane of the wall:

a. Positive pressure of 21.5 psf at non-corner zones. b. Negative pressure of 21.5 psf at non-corner zones. c. Negative pressure of 39.5 psf at corner zones.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide test reports from AAMA accredited laboratories certifying the performance as specified in

1.05. B. Test reports shall be accompanied by the entrance door manufacturer's letter of certification

stating that the tested door meets or exceeds the referenced performance standard for the appropriate door type.

1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Contractor shall submit shop drawings, finish samples, test reports, and warranties.


1. Samples of materials as may be requested without cost to owner, i.e., metal, glass, fasteners, anchors, frame sections, mullion section, corner section, etc.

1.07 WARRANTIES A. Total Entrance Door Installation

1. The responsible contractor shall assume full responsibility and warrant for one year the satisfactory performance of the total door installation which includes that of the manufacturer supplied doors, hardware, glass (including insulated units), glazing, anchorage and setting system, sealing, flashing, etc., as it relates to air, and structural adequacy as called for in the specifications and approved shop drawings.

2. Any deficiencies due to such elements not meeting the specifications shall be corrected by the responsible contractor at their expense during the warranty period.

B. Window Material and Workmanship 1. Provide written guarantee against defects in material and workmanship for 3 years from the

date of final shipment. C. Glass

1. Provide written warranty for insulated glass units that they will be free from obstruction of vision as a result of dust or film formation on the internal glass surfaces caused by failure of the hermetic seal due to defects in material and workmanship.

2. Warranty period shall be for 10 (ten) years. D. Finish

1. Warranty period shall be for 5 years from the date of final shipment. 2. Provide organic finish warranty based on AAMA standard 2605.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL

A. Aluminum 1. Extruded aluminum shall be 6063-T6 alloy and temper.

B. Hardware 1. Hardware for aluminum entrances shall be furnished and installed in the doors by the door

manufacturer, and shall include the following EFCO standard hardware. a. Hinging shall be continuous geared hinge.

b. Locks shall be latch lock. c. Closers shall be surface mounted. All closers to be Penal quality, extra heavy duty. d. Panic devices shall be rim device (removable mullion with pair of doors). e. Push-pull hardware shall be Ultraline wire push-pull. f. Thresholds g. Miscellaneous hardware items

2. Hardware for entrance doors (check with entrance door manufacturer for compatibility with door) is specified under “Hardware Section” of the specifications and shall be sent to the door manufacturer for application. The finish hardware supplier shall be responsible for furnishing physical hardware and templates of all hardware to the entrance door manufacturer prior to fabrication, and for coordinating hardware delivery requirements with the hardware manufacturer, the general contractor and the entrance door manufacturer to ensure the building project is not delayed.

C. Glass Type 2 – Single pane Glass Units: Vision glazing.

1. Per Section 08 8000 Glazing.


2.02 FABRICATION A. General

1. Major portions of the door sections shall have .125" (3 mm) wall thickness. Glazing stop sections shall have .050" (1.2 mm) wall thickness.

B. Entrance Doors 1. Door stiles shall be no less than 3 1/2" (88 mm) wide (not including glass stops). 2. Door stiles and rails shall have hairline joints at corners. Heavy concealed reinforcement

brackets shall be secured with screws and shall be of deep penetration and fillet welded. 3. All doors shall have an adjusting mechanism in the top rail to provide for minor clearance

adjustments. 4. Weather stripping shall be wool pile and shall be installed in one stile of pairs of doors and in

jamb stiles of center pivoted doors. 5. All pairs of doors shall have a removable mullion between leaves.

C. Glazing 1. All units shall be dry glazed with extruded pressure fitting aluminum glazing stops, and EPDM

gaskets. D. Finish

1. Organic a. Finish all exposed areas of aluminum windows and components with the following: AA Description Description AAMA Guide Spec. AA-M12-C42-R1X 70% PVDF Ultrapon™ 2605-98

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION

A. Job Conditions 1. Verify that openings are dimensionally within allowable tolerances, plumb, level, clean,

provide a solid anchoring surface and are in accordance with approved shop drawings. 2. Provide for manufacturer representation to conduct pre-installation site meeting.

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Use only skilled tradesmen with work done in accordance with approved shop drawings and

specifications. B. Plumb and align entrance door faces in a single plane for each wall plane and erect doors and

materials square and true. Adequately anchor to maintain positions permanently when subjected to normal thermal movement, specified building movement, and specified wind loads.

C. Adjust doors for proper operation after installation. D. Furnish and apply sealants to provide a weather tight installation at all joints and intersections

and at opening perimeters. Wipe off excess material and leave all exposed surfaces and joints clean and smooth.

3.03 ANCHORAGE A. Adequately anchor to maintain positions permanently when subjected to normal thermal

movement, specified building movement, and specified wind loads. 3.04 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. After completion of entrance installation, entrance doors shall be inspected, adjusted, put into working order and left clean, free of labels, dirt, etc. Protection from this point shall be the responsibility of the general contractor.


END OF SECTION


08 4229 - 1 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES

SECTION 08 4229 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES


A. Packaged power-operated door assemblies of following types: 1. Swinging type.

B. Operators for doors provided in other sections. C. Controllers, actuators and safety devices. D. Maintenance.

1.02 DEFINITIONS A. AAADM: American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010. B. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior

Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen; 2004 (Reapproved 2012).

C. BHMA A156.10 - American National Standard for Power Operated Pedestrian Doors; 2011. D. BHMA A156.19 - American National Standard for Power Assist and Low Energy Power

Operated Doors; 2013. E. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; current edition. F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. G. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code; 2015. H. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com. I. UL 325 - Standard for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems;

Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate layout and dimensions; head, jamb, and sill conditions; elevations; components, anchorage, recesses, materials, and finishes, electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

2. Identify installation tolerances required, assembly conditions, routing of service lines and conduit, and locations of operating components and boxes.

C. Product Data: Provide data on system components, sizes, features, and finishes. D. Samples: Submit two samples of exposed to view hardware, carpet with frame, and

attachment hardware. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions

requiring special attention, and manufacturer's hardware and component templates. F. Manufacturer's Qualification Statement. G. Installer's Qualification Statement. H. Maintenance Contract. I. Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's parts list and maintenance instructions for each

type of hardware and operating component.

http://www.ada.gov/











J. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this

section, with not less than three years of documented experience, and a member of AAADM. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with

at least three years documented experience. 1.06 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Provide two year manufacturer warranty.


A. Door Operators for Swing Doors Specified in Other Sections: 1. ASSA ABLOY Entrance Solutions; Besam SW200i - IG: www.besam-usa.com/#sle. 2. DORMA USA, Inc; ED100: www.dorma.com/#sle. 3. LCN, an Allegion brand: www.allegion.com/us/#sle. 4. Horton Automatics: www.hortondoors.com/#sle. 5. Stanley Access Technologies; Magic Access LE (Low Energy):

www.stanleyaccess.com/#sle. 2.02 POWER OPERATED DOORS

A. Power Operated Doors: Provide products that comply with NFPA 101 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction; provide equipment selected for actual door weight and for light pedestrian traffic, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Swinging Door Operators: Fully adjustable for opening and closing speeds, checking

speeds, and hold-open time; in the event of power failure, disengage operator allowing door to function as a door with a spring closer.

2. Sliding and Folding Door Operators: In the event of power failure, provide for manual open, close, and break-away operation of door leaves.

3. Packaged Door Assemblies: Provide components by single manufacturer, factory-assembled, including doors, frames, operators, actuators, and safeties.

4. Air Leakage: Maximum of 1.0 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area, when tested in accordance with ASTM E283 at 1.57 lbs/sq ft pressure differential across assembly.

5. Exterior Swinging Doors: Provide equipment capable of operating, closing, and holding doors closed under positive and negative differential pressure; if necessary, provide power closing.

6. Exterior and Vestibule Doors: Provide equipment suitable for operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 140 degrees F ambient.

B. Swinging Doors with Full Power Operators: Comply with BHMA A156.10; safeties required. 1. Comply with UL 325; acceptable evidence of compliance includes UL (DIR) or ITS (DIR)

listing or test report by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Force Required to Set Door in Motion When Unpowered: 30 pound-force, maximum,

measured at 1 inch from the latch edge of the door at any point in the closing cycle. 2.03 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOOR ASSEMBLIES

A. Comply with ADA Standards for egress requirements. B. Framing and Transom Members: Provide manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum framing,

reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Nominal Sizes:

a. Single Slide and Bi-Parting Sliding Doors: 1-3/4 inch wide by 4-1/2 inch deep.







2. Transoms: Provide flush glazed transom with framing that is integral with automatic entrance framing system.

2.04 OPERATORS FOR SWINGING DOORS PROVIDED BY OTHERS A. Door Operator: Electric, surface mounted overhead.

1. Operation: Full-power open, spring close operation. 2. Variable speed control for opening and closing cycles. 3. Push-Side Actuator: Mat switch. 4. Pull-Side Actuator: Mat switch. 5. Pull-Side Safety: Door-mounted.

2.05 CONTROLLERS, ACTUATORS, AND SAFETIES A. Controller: Provide microprocessor operated controller for each door. B. Comply with BHMA A156.10 for actuator and safety types and zones. C. Mat Switch Actuator/Safety: Surface hermetically sealed molded vinyl with two plate contact

sheet, low voltage operation. D. Proximity Detector Actuator/Safety: Microwave; distance of control sensitivity adjustable.

2.06 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS A. Provide shielded and explosion proof electrical devices. B. Electrical Characteristics:

1. Refer to Electrical Drawings. C. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes,

and materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70. D. Disconnect Switch: Factory mount disconnect switch in control panel.

2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Handrails.


A. Verify that electric power is available and is of the correct characteristics. 3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust door equipment for correct function and smooth operation. 3.04 CLEANING

A. Remove temporary protection, clean exposed surfaces. 3.05 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. Demonstrate operation, operating components, adjustment features, and lubrication requirements.

3.06 MAINTENANCE A. See Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements, for additional requirements

relating to maintenance service. B. Provide a separate maintenance contract for specified maintenance service. C. Provide service and maintenance of operating equipment for one year from Date of Substantial

Completion, at no extra charge to Owner. END OF SECTION



1961 RTA WSP 2020 REVISIONS 08 4313 - 1 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS DESIGN GROUP 3, LLC

SECTION 08 4313 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS


A. Aluminum-framed storefront, with vision glass. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back-up materials. B. Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Glass and glazing accessories.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; American Society of Civil

Engineers; 2011. B. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2010. C. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights,

Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2009). D. ASTM E1105 - Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed

Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls, by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2008)

E. ASTM E1996 - Standard Specification for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors, and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Windborne Debris in Hurricanes; 2012.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate with installation of other components that comprise the exterior enclosure.

1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly,

anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, door hardware, internal drainage details and standard colors.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances, affected related Work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field welding required.

D. Samples: Submit two samples 4 x 4 inches in size illustrating finished aluminum surface. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that the products supplied meet or exceed the specified

requirements. F. Report of field testing for water leakage. G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's

name and registered with manufacturer. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum glazing systems with minimum three years of documented experience.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10. B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed

coatings that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather.


1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. Maintain this

minimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation. 1.09 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass units,

including interpane dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of failed units. D. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish.

Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design: EFCO Corporation. B. Aluminum-Framed Storefront:

1. C.R. Laurence Co., Inc; U.S. Aluminum: www.crl-arch.com. 2. EFCO Corporation: www.efcocorp.com. 3. YKK AP America Inc: www.ykkap.com. 4. Kawneer North America: www.kawneer.com. 5. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope: www.oldcastlebe.com. 6. Tubelite, Inc: www.tubeliteinc.com. 7. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 STOREFRONT A. Aluminum-Framed Storefront: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing members

with infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. 1. Unitized, shop assembly. 2. Glazing Rabbet: For 1 inch insulating glazing. 3. Glazing Position: Centered (front to back). 4. Finish: High performance organic coating.

a. Factory finish all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies. b. Touch-up surfaces cut during fabrication so that no natural aluminum is visible in

completed assemblies, including joint edges. c. Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or

dissimilar metals with bituminous paint. 5. Finish Color: Clear.

B. Performance Requirements: 1. Wind Loads: Design and size components to withstand the specified load requirements

without damage or permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E330, using loads 1.5 times the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load. a. Design Wind Loads: Comply with requirements of Ohio building code. b. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction,

with full recovery of glazing materials. 2. Wind-Borne-Debris Resistance: Identical full-size glazed assembly without auxiliary

protection, tested by independent agency in accordance with ASTM E1996 for Wind Zone 4, Basic Protection, for Large and Small Missile impact and pressure cycling at design wind pressure.

3. Water Penetration Resistance: No uncontrolled water on interior face, when tested in accordance with ASTM E331 at pressure differential of 8.00 lbf/sq ft.

4. Air Leakage: Maximum of 0.06 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area, when tested in accordance with ASTM E283 at 6.27 pounds per square foot pressure differential across assembly.


5. Condensation Resistance Factor of Framing: 50, minimum, measured in accordance with AAMA 1503.

6. Overall U-value Including Glazing: 30 Btu/(hr sq ft deg F), maximum. 7. Movement: Accommodate movement between storefront and perimeter framing and

deflection of lintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals. 8. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.06 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area,

measured at specified differential pressure across assembly in accordance with ASTM E283.

9. Condensation Resistance Factor: Measure in accordance with AAMA 1503 with 1 inch insulating glass installed.

10. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E331 at specified pressure differential.

11. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E547 at specified pressure differential.

12. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture occurring within system.

13. Air and Vapor Seal: Maintain continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout assembly, primarily in line with inside pane of glass and inner sheet of infill panel and heel bead of glazing compound.

14. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period without causing detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other building elements.

2.03 COMPONENTS A. Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections, drainage holes and internal weep

drainage system. 1. Cross-Section: 2” x 6” as noted on the drawings.

B. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 8000 - Glazing. 2.04 MATERIALS

A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M). B. Fasteners: Stainless steel. C. Exposed Flashings: 0.032 inch thick aluminum sheet; finish to match framing members. D. Perimeter Sealant: As specified in Section 07 9005. E. Glass: As specified in Section 08 8000. F. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration

requirements. G. Glazing Accessories: As specified in Section 08 8000.

2.05 FINISHES A. Class I Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Clear anodic coating or AAMA

612 clear anodic coating with electrolytically deposited organic seal; not less than 0.7 mils thick. 2.06 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal.

B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof. C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors. D. Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar

metals with bituminous paint. E. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view.


PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work. B. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of

this section. 3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and

other irregularities. C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional

tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. F. Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam. G. Where fasteners penetrate sill flashings, make watertight by seating and sealing fastener heads

to sill flashing. H. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials. I. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of

thermal barrier. J. Install glass in accordance with Section 08 8000, using glazing method required to achieve

performance criteria. K. Install perimeter sealant in accordance with Section 07 9005. L. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be

satisfactorily repaired. 3.03 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 1/16 inches per 10 ft, whichever is less.

B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for independent testing and inspection requirements. Inspection will monitor quality of installation and glazing.

3.05 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces. B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean

wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. C. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer.

3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage during subsequent construction.

END OF SECTION

1961 RTA WSP 2020 REVISIONS 08-4413 - 1 ALUMINUM GLAZED CURTAINWALL DESIGN GROUP 3, LLC.

SECTION 08 4413 ALUMINUM GLAZED CURTAIN WALL


A. Furnish and install architectural aluminum curtain wall complete with related components as shown on drawings and specified in this section.

B. Basis of design: EFCO® Series 5600 Outside Glazed. C. Acceptable manufactirers: EFCO Corporation, Oldcastle Building Products, or approved equal. D. Glass

1. Reference Section 08 8000 for Glass and Glazing. 1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Section 01 2300 – Alternates B. Section 08 4113 – Aluminum – Framed Entrances and Storefronts C. Section 08 8000 – Glazing D. Section 10 7113 – Exterior Sun Shades and Awnings

1.03 LABORATORY TESTING AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Test Units

1. Air, water, and structural test unit size shall be a minimum of two stories high and three lites wide.

2. Thermal test unit sizes shall be 80" (2032 mm) wide x 80" (2032 mm) high with one intermediate vertical mullion and two lites of glass.

B. Test Procedures and Performance 1. Air Infiltration Test

a. Test unit in accordance with ASTM E 283 at a static air pressure difference of 6.24 psf (300 Pa).

b. Air infiltration shall not exceed .06 cfm/SF (.31 l/s•m²) of unit. 2. Water Resistance Test

a. Test unit in accordance with ASTM E 331. b. The test for static water penetration (ASTM E 331) shall be conducted at an air pressure

difference of 15.0 psf (720 Pa). There shall be no water leakage as defined by AAMA 501.1, paragraph 5.5.

3. Uniform Load Deflection Test a. Test in accordance with ASTM E 330. b. Deflection under design load shall not exceed L/175 for spans less than 162" (4114 mm). c. Deflection under design load shall not exceed L/240 +1/4” (6 mm) for spans greater than

162" (4114 mm). 4. Uniform Load Structural Test

a. Test in accordance with ASTM E 330 at a pressure 1.5 times the design wind pressure in 1.05.B.3.b.

b. At conclusion of the test there shall be no glass breakage, permanent damage to fasteners, curtain wall parts, or any other damage that would cause the curtain wall to be defective.

5. Seismic Performance a. Test unit in accordance to AAMA 501.4 system to meet design displacement of 0.010 x

the greater adjacent story height and ultimate displacement of 1.5 x the design displacement.

6. Sound Transmission Loss a. Test unit in accordance with ASTM E 90-02. b. Sound Transmission Class (STC) shall not be less than 29.

C. Project Wind Loads 1. The system shall be designed to withstand the following loads normal to the plane of the wall:

a. Positive pressure of 21.5 psf at non-corner zones. b. Negative pressure of 21.5 psf at non-corner zones. c. Negative pressure of 39.5 psf at corner zones.


1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide test reports from AAMA accredited laboratories certifying the performance as specified in

1.05. B. Test reports shall be accompanied by the curtain wall manufacturer’s letter of certification stating

that the tested curtain wall meets or exceeds the referenced criteria for the appropriate curtain wall type.

1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Contractor shall submit shop drawings; finish samples, test reports, and warranties.

1. Samples of materials as may be requested without cost to owner, i.e., metal, glass, fasteners, anchors, frame sections, mullion section, corner section, etc.

1.06 WARRANTIES A. Total Curtain Wall Installation

1. The responsible contractor shall assume full responsibility and warrant for one year the satisfactory performance of the total curtain wall installation. This includes the glass (including insulated units), glazing, anchorage and setting system, sealing, flashing, etc. as it relates to air, water, and structural adequacy and the specifications and approved shop drawings.


B. Window Material and Workmanship 1. Provide written guarantee against defects in material and workmanship for 5 years from the

date of final shipment. C. Glass

1. Provide written warranty for insulated glass units, that they will be free from obstruction of vision as a result of dust or film formation on the internal glass surfaces caused by failure of the hermetic seal due to defects in material and workmanship.

2. Warranty period shall be for 10 (ten) years. D. Finish

1. Warranty period shall be for 5 years from the date of final shipment. 2. Provide organic finish warranty based on AAMA standard 2605.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum 1. Extruded aluminum shall be 6063-T6 alloy and temper.

B. Anchors 1. Perimeter and floor line anchors shall be aluminum or steel. All steel anchors shall be

properly insulated from the aluminum. C. Thermal Barrier

1. The thermal barrier shall be extruded PVC used as an applied thermal isolator. D. Manufacturerr

1. T 2.02 FABRICATION

A. General 1. All aluminum vertical and horizontal extrusions shall have a minimum wall thickness of .093"

(2.3 mm) to .125" (3 mm). B. Frame

1. Frame components shall be mechanically fastened by means of extruded aluminum shear blocks attached to vertical mullions.

2. Curtain wall system is able to accommodate separate interior and exterior finishes and colors.

C. Glazing 1. Outside glazed curtain wall system shall be dry glazed with an exterior aluminum pressure

plate and snap cover with interior and exterior dense EPDM preset gaskets.


D. Finish 1. Organic

a. Finish all exposed areas of aluminum windows and components with: AA Description Description AAMA Guide Spec. AA-M12-C42-R1X 70% PVDF Ultrapon™ 2605-98

2. Colors: Provide up to 5 colors as directed by Architect. Colors selected from manufacturers stardard color line.


A. Job Conditions 1. All openings shall be prepared by others to the proper size and shall be plumb, level, and in

the proper location and alignment as shown on the architect's drawings. 2. Provide for manufacturer representation to conduct pre-installation site meeting. 3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Use only skilled tradesmen with work done in accordance with approved shop drawings and established specifications, and erect all curtain wall components to all building bench marks and column center lines.

B. Plumb and align curtain wall faces in a single plane for each wall plane, and erect curtain wall materials square and true. Adequately anchor to maintain positions permanently when subjected to normal thermal movement, building movement, and specified wind loads.

C. Adjust windows in curtain wall for proper operation after installation. D. Furnish and apply sealants to provide a weather tight installation at all joints and intersections

and at opening perimeters. Wipe off excess material, leave all exposed surfaces and joints clean and smooth.

3.03 ANCHORAGE A. Adequately anchor to maintain positions permanently when subjected to normal thermal

movement, specified building movement, and specified wind loads. 3.04 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. The general contractor shall protect the aluminum materials and finish against damage from construction activities and harmful substances. The general contractor shall remove any protective coatings as directed by the architect, and shall clean the aluminum surfaces as recommended for the type of finish applied.

END OF SECTION

1961 RTA WSP 2020 REVISIONS 08 4523 - 1 TRANSLUCENT SKYLIGHTS DESIGN GROUP 3, LLC.

SECTION 08 4523

INSULATED TRANSLUCENT FIBERGLASS SANDWICH PANEL SKYLIGHT SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the insulated translucent sandwich panel skylight system and accessories as shown and specified. Work includes providing and installing: 1. Factory prefabricated structural insulated translucent sandwich panels 2. Aluminum installation system 3. Aluminum flashing attached to skylights

B. Related Sections: 1. Structural Steel Framing: Section 05 1200 2. Joint Sealers: Section 07 9005 3. Glazing: Section 08 8000

1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer’s product data. Include construction details, material descriptions, profiles and finishes of skylight components. B. Submit shop drawings. Include elevations and details. C. Submit manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for factory-finished

aluminum. 1. When requested, submit samples for each exposed finish required, in same thickness and material

indicated for the work and in size indicated below. If finishes involve normal color variations, include sample sets consisting of two or more units showing the full range of variations expected. a. Sandwich panels: 14” X 28”” units b. Factory finished aluminum: 5’ long sections

D. Submit Installer Certificate, signed by installer, certifying compliance with project qualification requirements.

E. Submit product reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating each type and class of panel system complies with the project performance requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products. Previously completed reports will be acceptable if for current manufacturer and indicative of products used on this project. 1. Reports required are:

a. International Building Code Evaluation Report b. Flame Spread and Smoke Developed (UL 723) – Submit UL Card c. Burn Extent (ASTM D 635) d. Color Difference (ASTM D 2244) e. Impact Strength (UL 972) f. Bond Tensile Strength (ASTM C 297 after aging by ASTM D 1037) g. Bond Shear Strength (ASTM D 1002) h. Beam Bending Strength (ASTM E 72) i. Fall Through Resistance (ASTM E 661) j. Insulation U-Factor (NFRC 100) k. NFRC System U-Factor Certification (NFRC 700)


l. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (NFRC or Calculations) m. Condensation Resistance Factor (AAMA 1503) n. Air Leakage (ASTM E 283) o. Structural Performance (ASTM E 330) p. Water Penetration (ASTM E 331) q. Class A Roof Covering Burning Brand (ASTM E 108) r. UL Listed Class A Roof System (UL 790) (Optional) – Submit UL Card

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications

1 Material and products shall be manufactured by a company continuously and regularly employed in the manufacture of specified materials for a period of at least ten consecutive years and which can show evidence of those materials being satisfactorily used on at least six projects of similar size, scope and location. At least three of the projects shall have been in successful use for ten years or longer.

2. Panel system must be listed by an ANSI accredited Evaluation Service, which requires quality control inspections and fire, structural and water infiltration testing of sandwich panel systems by an accredited agency.

3. Quality control inspections shall be conducted at least once each year and shall include manufacturing facilities, sandwich panel components and production sandwich panels for conformance with AC177 “Translucent Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Faced Panel Wall, Roof and Skylight Systems” as issued by the ICC-ES.

B. Installer’s Qualifications: Installation shall be by an experienced installer, which has been in the business of installing specified skylight systems for at least two consecutive years and can show evidence of satisfactory completion of projects of similar size, scope and type.

1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. The manufacturer shall be responsible for the configuration and fabrication of the complete skylight panel

system. 1 Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified manufacturers professional

engineer responsible for their preparation. 2. Standard skylight system shall have less than 0.01 cfm/ft² air leakage by ASTM E 283 at 6.24 PSF

(50 mph) and no water penetration by ASTM E 331 at 15 PSF; and structural testing by ASTM E 330. 3. Structural Loads; Provide skylight system capable of handling the following loads:

a Live Load: 25 PSF b Snow Load: 0 PSF; Drift Load: 0 PSF c Wind Load: 20 PSF

1.05 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver panel system, components and materials in manufacturer's standard protective packaging. B. Store panels on the long edge; several inches above the ground, blocked and under cover in accordance

with manufacturer's storage and handling instructions. 1.06 WARRANTY

A. Submit manufacturer's and installer's written warranty agreeing to repair or replace panel system work, which fails in materials or workmanship within one year of the date of delivery. Failure of materials or workmanship shall include leakage, excessive deflection, deterioration of finish on metal in excess of normal weathering, defects in accessories, insulated translucent sandwich panels and other components of the work.

B. 5-year material and workmanship C. 10-year finish warranty


PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. The basis for this specification is for products manufactured by Kalwall Corporation. Other manufacturers may bid this project provided they comply with all of the performance requirements of this specification and submit evidence thereof and must be submitted 10-days prior to bid date. Listing other manufacturers’ names in this specification does not constitute approval of their products or relieve them of compliance with all the performance requirements contained herein.

B. Kalwall Corporation, as distributed by Shaffner Heaney, Assoc. Contact: Jason Clarkson Tel: (317) 842-6090 – Email: [email protected]

2.02 PANEL COMPONENTS A. Face Sheets

1. Translucent faces: Manufactured from glass fiber reinforced thermoset resins, formulated specifically

for architectural use. a. Thermoplastic (e.g. polycarbonate, acrylic) faces are not acceptable. b. Face sheets shall not deform, deflect or drip when subjected to fire or flame.

2. Interior face sheets: a. Flame spread: Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listed, which requires periodic unannounced

retesting, with flame spread rating no greater than 20 and smoke developed no greater than 200 when tested in accordance with UL 723.

b. Burn extent by ASTM D 635 shall be no greater than 1”. 3. Exterior face sheets:

a. Color stability: Full thickness of the exterior face sheet shall not change color more than 3 CIE Units DELTA E by ASTM D 2244 after 3 years outdoor South Florida weathering at 5° facing south, determined by the average of at least three white samples with and without a protective film or coating to ensure long-term color stability. Color stability shall be unaffected by abrasion or scratching.

b. Strength: Exterior face sheet shall be uniform in strength, impenetrable by hand held pencil and repel an impact minimum of 70 ft. lbs. without fracture or tear when impacted by a 3-1/4” diameter, 5 lb. free-falling ball per UL 972.

4. Appearance: a. Exterior face sheets: Smooth, .070 thick and SW white in color. b. Interior face sheets: Smooth, .045 thick and Type 25 white in color. c. Face sheets shall not vary more than ± 10% in thickness and be uniform in color.

B. Grid Core 1 Aluminum I-beam grid core shall be of 6063-T6 or 6005-T5 alloy and temper with provisions for

mechanical interlocking of muntin-mullion and perimeter. Width of I-beam shall be no less than 7/16”. C. Laminate Adhesive

1. Heat and pressure resin type adhesive engineered for structural sandwich panel use, with minimum 25-years field use. Adhesive shall pass testing requirements specified by the International Code Council “Acceptance Criteria for Sandwich Panel Adhesives”.

2. Minimum tensile strength of 750 PSI when the panel assembly is tested by ASTM C 297 after two exposures to six cycles each of the aging conditions prescribed by ASTM D 1037.

3. Minimum shear strength of the panel adhesive by ASTM D 1002 after exposure to four separate conditions: a. 50% Relative Humidity at 68° F: 540 PSI b. 182° F: 100 PSI

mailto:[email protected]


c. Accelerated Aging by ASTM D 1037 at room temperature: 800 PSI d. Accelerated Aging by ASTM D 1037 at 182° F: 250 PSI

2.03 PANEL CONSTRUCTION A. Provide sandwich panels of flat fiberglass reinforced translucent face sheets laminated to a grid core of

mechanically interlocking I-beams. The adhesive bonding line shall be straight, cover the entire width of the I-beam and have a neat, sharp edge. 1. Thickness: 2-3/4” 2. Light transmission: 15% 3. Solar heat gain coefficient .23. 4. Panel U-factor by NFRC certified laboratory: 2-3/4” aluminum grid 5. Complete insulated panel system shall have NFRC certified U-factor of .29. 6. Grid pattern: Nominal size 24” X 12”; pattern Shoji.

B. Standard panels shall deflect no more than 1.9” at 30 PSF in 10’ 0” span without a supporting frame by ASTM E 72.

C. Standard panels shall withstand 1200° F fire for minimum one hour without collapse or exterior flaming.

D. Thermally broken panels: Minimum Condensation Resistance Factor of 80 by AAMA 1503 measured on the bond line.

E. Skylight System: 1. Skylight system shall pass Class A Roof Burning Brand Test By ASTM E 108.

F. Skylight System shall meet the fall through requirements of OSHA 1910.23 as demonstrated by testing in accordance with ASTM E661, thereby not requiring supplemental screens or railings.

2.04 BATTENS AND PERIMETER CLOSURE SYSTEM A. Closure system:

1. Extruded aluminum 6063-T6 and 6063-T5 alloy and temper clamp-tite screw type closure system. 2. Curved closure system may be roll formed. 3. Skylight perimeter closures at curbs shall be factory sealed to panels.

B. Sealing tape: Manufacturer's standard, pre-applied to closure system at the factory under controlled conditions. C. Fasteners: 300 series stainless steel screws for aluminum closures, excluding final fasteners to the building. D. Finish:

1 Manufacturer's factory applied finish, which meets the performance requirements of AAMA 2604. Color to be Mountain Green #70.


A. Installer shall examine substrates, supporting structure and installation conditions. B. Do not proceed with panel installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION A. Metal Protection:

Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.

1. Where aluminum will contact concrete, masonry or pressure treated wood, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint or method recommended by manufacturer.


3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install the skylight system in accordance with the manufacturer's suggested installation recommendations and approved shop drawings.

1 Anchor component parts securely in place by permanent mechanical attachment system. 2. Accommodate thermal and mechanical movements. 2. Set perimeter framing in a full bed of sealant compound, or with joint fillers or gaskets to provide

weather-tight construction. B. Install joint sealants at perimeter joints and within the panel system in accordance with manufacturer's

installation instructions. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Water Test: Installer to test skylights according to procedures in AAMA 501.2. B. Repair or replace work that does not pass testing or that is damaged by testing and retest work.

3.05 CLEANING A. Clean the skylight system interior and exterior, immediately after installation. B. Refer to manufacturer's written recommendations.

END OF SECTION

1961 RTA WSP 2020 RENOVATIONS 08 7100 - 1 DOOR HARDWARE DESIGN GROUP 3, LLC

SECTION 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE


A. Hanging devices. B. Door Trim C. Thresholds D. Cylinders and Keying E. Locks and Latches F. Exit devices. G. Closers. H. Push bars and pull handles.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. B. Section 08 3613 - Sectional Doors. C. Section 08 3313 – Coiling Counter Doors. D. Section 08 4313 - Aluminum-Framed Storefronts: Hardware for same except cylinders and

installation of cylinders. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010. B. BHMA A156.3 - American National Standard for Exit Devices; 2014. C. BHMA A156.18 - American National Standard for Materials and Finishes; 2012. D. BHMA A156.115 - American National Standard for Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and

Steel Frames; 2014. E. BHMA A156.115W - Hardware Preparation in Wood Doors with Wood or Steel Frames; 2006. F. DHI WDHS.3 - Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Flush Wood Doors;

1993; also in WDHS-1/WDHS-5 Series, 1996. G. ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; 2009. H. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2016. I. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code; 2015. J. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com. K. UL 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition,

Including All Revisions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog literature for each type of hardware, marked to clearly

show products to be furnished for this project. C. Hardware Schedule: Detailed listing of each item of hardware to be installed on each door.

Use door numbering scheme as included in the Contract Documents. Identify electrically operated items and include power requirements.

D. Keying Schedule: Submit for approval of Owner. E. Samples:

1. Submit one (1) sample of material illustrating style, color, and finish. 2. Samples will be returned to supplier.

http://www.ada.gov/




http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ANSI%20A156.115-W

http://www.dhi.org/publications/index.asp





http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=UL%2010C


F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention.

G. Maintenance Data: Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance. 1. Submit manufacturer's parts lists and templates.

H. Keys: Deliver with identifying tags to Owner by security shipment direct from hardware supplier.

I. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in

this section with minimum three years of experience. B. Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Company specializing in supplying the type of products

specified in this section with at least three years documented experience. C. Hardware Supplier Personnel: Employ an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) to assist in

the work of this section. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code to match hardware schedule.

1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide five year warranty for door closers and Locksets.


A. As indicated below B. Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical and

electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the specifications must be submitted in writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in Division 01, Substitution Procedures. Approval of requests is at the discretion of the architect, owner, and their designated consultants.

2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide door hardware specified, or as required to make doors fully functional, compliant with

applicable codes, and secure to the extent indicated. B. Provide items of a single type of the same model by the same manufacturer. C. Provide products that comply with the following:

1. Applicable provisions of federal, state, and local codes. 2. Accessibility: ADA Standards and ICC A117.1. 3. Applicable provisions of NFPA 101, Life Safety Code. 4. Fire-Rated Doors: NFPA 80. 5. Hardware on Fire-Rated Doors, Except Hinges: Listed and classified by UL (DIR) as

suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 6. Hardware Preparation for Steel Doors and Steel Frames: BHMA A156.115. 7. Hardware Preparation for Wood Doors with Wood or Steel Frames: BHMA A156.115W. 8. Hardware for Smoke and Draft Control Doors: Provide hardware that enables door

assembly to comply with air leakage requirements of the applicable code. 9. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL (DIR) as suitable

for the purpose specified and indicated.

http://www.ada.gov/





http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ANSI%20A156.115-W


D. Function: Lock and latch function numbers and descriptions of manufactures series as listed in hardware schedule.

E. Electrically Operated and/or Controlled Hardware: Provide all power supplies, power transfer hinges, relays, and interfaces required for proper operation; provide wiring between hardware and control components and to building power connection.

F. Finishes: Identified in schedule. 2.03 HANGING DEVICES

A. Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 certified butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles as specified in the Door Hardware Sets. 1. Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity, unless otherwise indicated:

a. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches. b. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. c. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches. d. For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge

for every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches. 2. Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for

door thickness and clearances required: a. Widths up to 3’0”: 4-1/2” standard or heavy weight as specified. b. Sizes from 3’1” to 4’0”: 5” standard or heavy weight as specified.

3. Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: a. Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing or oil impregnated

bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate standard weight. b. Interior Doors: Standard weight, steel, ball bearing or oil impregnated

bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate heavy weight. 4. Hinge Options: Comply with the following where indicated in the Hardware Sets or on

Drawings: a. Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened

into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the all out-swinging lockable doors.

5. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Hager Companies (HA). b. Ives (IV). c. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK). d. Stanley Hardware (ST).

B. Continuous Geared Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.26 Grade 1-600 certified continuous geared hinge. with minimum 0.120-inch thick extruded 6060 T6 aluminum alloy hinge leaves and a minimum overall width of 4 inches. Hinges are non-handed, reversible and fabricated to template screw locations. Factory trim hinges to suit door height and prepare for electrical cut-outs. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Hager Companies (HA). b. Ives (IV). c. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK). d. Pemko Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (PE). e. Stanley Hardware (ST).


C. Sliding and Folding Door Hardware: Hardware is to be of type and design as specified and should comply with ANSI/BHMA A156.14. 1. Sliding Bi-Passing Pocket Door Hardware: Provide complete sets consisting of track,

hangers, stops, bumpers, floor channel, guides, and accessories indicated. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Hafele Manufacturing (HF). b. Hager Companies (HA). c. Johnson Hardware (JO). d. Pemko Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (PE).

2.04 POWER TRANSFER DEVICES A. Electrified Quick Connect Transfer Hinges: Provide electrified transfer hinges with Molex™

standardized plug connectors and sufficient number of concealed wires (up to 12) to accommodate the electrified functions specified in the Door Hardware Sets. Connectors plug directly to through-door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Wire nut connections are not acceptable. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Hager Companies (HA) - ETW-QC (# wires) Option. b. Ives (IV) – CONNECT Series. c. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK) -

QC (# wires) Option. d. Stanley Hardware (ST) – C Option.

B. Concealed Quick Connect Electric Power Transfers: Provide concealed wiring pathway housing mortised into the door and frame for low voltage electrified door hardware. Furnish with Molex™ standardized plug connectors and sufficient number of concealed wires (up to 12) to accommodate the electrified functions specified in the Door Hardware Sets. Connectors plug directly to through-door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Wire nut connections are not acceptable. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Securitron (SU) - EL-CEPT Series. b. Stanley Hardware (ST) EPT-12C Series. c. Von Duprin (VD) - EPT-10 Series.

C. Electric Door Wire Harnesses: Provide electric/data transfer wiring harnesses with standardized plug connectors to accommodate up to twelve (12) wires. Connectors plug directly to through-door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Provide sufficient number and type of concealed wires to accommodate electric function of specified hardware. Provide a connector for through-door electronic locking devices and from hinge to junction box above the opening. Wire nut connections are not acceptable. Determine the length required for each electrified hardware component for the door type, size and construction, minimum of two per electrified opening. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Ives (IV) CONNECT Series. b. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK) –

QC-C Series. c. Stanley Hardware (ST) – WH Series.

D. Provide mortar guard enclosure on steel frames installed at masonry openings for each electrical hinge specified.


2.05 DOOR OPERATING TRIM A. Flush Bolts and Surface Bolts: ANSI/BHMA A156.3 and A156.16, Grade 1, certified.

1. Flush bolts to be furnished with top rod of sufficient length to allow bolt retraction device location approximately six feet from the floor.

2. Furnish dust proof strikes for bottom bolts. 3. Surface bolts to be minimum 8” in length and U.L. listed for labeled fire doors and U.L.

listed for windstorm components where applicable. 4. Provide related accessories (mounting brackets, strikes, coordinators, etc.) as required for

appropriate installation and operation. 5. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Ives (IV). b. Rockwood Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (RO). c. Trimco (TC).

B. Coordinators: ANSI/BHMA A156.3 certified door coordinators consisting of active-leaf, hold-open lever and inactive-leaf release trigger. Model as indicated in hardware sets. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Ives (IV). b. Rockwood Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (RO). c. Trimco (TC).

C. Door Push Plates and Pulls: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified door pushes and pulls of type and design specified in the Hardware Sets. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. 1. Push/Pull Plates: Minimum .050 inch thick, size as indicated in hardware sets, with beveled

edges, secured with exposed screws unless otherwise indicated. 2. Door Pull and Push Bar Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware

sets. Minimum clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door unless otherwise indicated. 3. Offset Pull Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum

clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door and offset of 90 degrees unless otherwise indicated.

4. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as indicated in Hardware Sets.

5. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Hiawatha, Inc. (HI). b. Ives (IV). c. Rockwood Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (RO). d. Trimco (TC).

2.06 CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years’ experience designing secured

master key systems and have on record a published security keying system policy. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of keyed cylinder and keys from the same source

manufacturer as locksets and exit devices, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) – L4 keyway. b. No Substitution.


C. Cylinders: Original manufacturer cylinders complying with the following: 1. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and cams to suit hardware application. 2. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised

trim ring. 3. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks. 4. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be

flush and be free spinning with matching finishes. 5. Keyway: Match Facility Standard.

D. Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory keyed. 1. Conduct specified "Keying Conference" to define and document keying system instructions

and requirements. 2. Furnish factory cut, nickel-silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual key control

number as directed by Owner. 3. Existing System: Key locks to Owner's existing system.

E. Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys: 1. Change Keys per Cylinder: Two (2) Three (3). 2. Master Keys (per Master Key Level/Group): Five (5). 3. Construction Keys (where required): Ten (10).

F. Construction Keying: Provide construction master keyed cylinders. G. Key Registration List (Bitting List):

1. Provide keying transcript list to Owner's representative in the proper format for importing into key control software.

2. Provide transcript list in writing or electronic file as directed by the Owner. H. Key Control Cabinet: Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, and tags with self-

locking key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard metal cabinet. Key control cabinet shall have expansion capacity of 150% of the number of locks required for the project. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Lund Equipment (LU). b. MMF Industries (MM). c. Telkee (TK).

2.07 LOCK AND LATCH STRIKES A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with

curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows: 1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by

manufacturer. 2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. 3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for

aluminum framing. 4. Double-lipped strikes: For locks at double acting doors. Furnish with retractable stop for

rescue hardware applications. B. Standards: Comply with the following:

1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13.


2. Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2. 3. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.36. 4. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16.

2.08 LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Locks: Provide a lock for every door, unless specifically indicated as not requiring locking.

1. Hardware Sets indicate locking functions required for each door. 2. If no hardware set is indicated for a swinging door provide an office lockset. 3. Trim: Provide lever handle or pull trim on outside of all locks unless specifically stated to

have no outside trim. 4. Lock Cylinders: Provide key access on outside of all locks unless specifically stated to

have no locking or no outside trim. B. Electrically Operated Locks: Fail secure unless otherwise indicated. C. Lock Cylinders: Manufacturer’s standard tumbler type, six-pin standard core.

1. Provide cams and/or tailpieces as required for locking devices required. D. Keying: Grand master keyed.

1. Include construction keying. 2. Key to existing keying system. 3. Supply keys in the following quantities:

a. 4 master keys. b. 4 change keys for each lock.

4. When providing keying information, comply with DHI Handbook "Keying systems and nomenclature".

E. Latches: Provide a latch for every door that is not required to lock, unless specifically indicated "push/pull" or "not required to latch".

2.09 AUXILIARY LOCKS A. Cylindrical Deadlocks: ANSI/BHMA A156.36, Grade 1, cylindrical type deadlocks to fit standard

ANSI 161 preparation and 1 3/8" to 1 3/4" thickness doors. Provide tapered collars to resist vandalism and 1" throw solid steel bolt with hardened steel roller pins. Deadlocks to be products of the same source manufacturer and keyway as other locksets. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - DL3200 Series. b. Schlage (SC) - B600 Series. c. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) – D200 Series.

2.10 CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES A. General Requirements: All exit devices specified herein shall meet or exceed the following

criteria: 1. At doors not requiring a fire rating, provide devices complying with NFPA 101 and listed

and labeled for "Panic Hardware" according to UL305. Provide proper fasteners as required by manufacturer including sex nuts and bolts at openings specified in the Hardware Sets.

2. Where exit devices are required on fire rated doors, provide devices complying with NFPA 80 and with UL labeling indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". Provide devices with the proper fasteners for installation as tested and listed by UL. Consult manufacturer’s catalog and template book for specific requirements.


3. Except on fire rated doors, provide exit devices with hex key dogging device to hold the pushbar and latch in a retracted position. Provide optional keyed cylinder dogging on devices where specified in Hardware Sets.

4. Devices must fit flat against the door face with no gap that permits unauthorized dogging of the push bar. The addition of filler strips is required in any case where the door light extends behind the device as in a full glass configuration.

5. Lever Operating Trim: Where exit devices require lever trim, furnish manufacturer's heavy duty escutcheon trim with threaded studs for thru-bolts.

a. Lock Trim Design: As indicated in Hardware Sets, provide finishes and designs to match that of the specified locksets.

b. Where function of exit device requires a cylinder, provide a cylinder (Rim or Mortise) as specified in Hardware Sets.

6. Vertical Rod Exit Devices: Where surface or concealed vertical rod exit devices are used at interior openings, provide as less bottom rod (LBR) unless otherwise indicated. Provide dust proof strikes where thermal pins are required to project into the floor.

7. Narrow Stile Applications: At doors constructed with narrow stiles, or as specified in Hardware Sets, provide devices designed for maximum 2” wide stiles.

8. Dummy Push Bar: Nonfunctioning push bar matching functional push bar. 9. Rail Sizing: Provide exit device rails factory sized for proper door width application. 10. Through Bolt Installation: For exit devices and trim as indicated in Door Hardware Sets.

B. Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 certified panic and fire exit hardware devices furnished in the functions specified in the Hardware Sets. Exit device latch to be stainless steel, pullman type, with deadlock feature. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - ED4000 / ED5000 Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 80 Series. c. Von Duprin (VD) - 35A/98 Series.

2.11 DOOR CLOSERS A. All door closers specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria:

1. General: Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and style, with the same type door preparations and templates regardless of application or spring size. Closers to be non-handed with full sized covers including installation and adjusting information on inside of cover.

2. Standards: Closers to comply with UL-10C for Positive Pressure Fire Test and be U.L. listed for use of fire rated doors.

3. Cycle Testing: Provide closers which have surpassed 15 million cycles in a test witnessed and verified by UL.

4. Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Where closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically handicapped, provide units complying with ANSI ICC/A117.1.

5. Closer Arms: Provide heavy duty, forged steel closer arms unless otherwise indicated in Hardware Sets.

6. Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install closers on door for optimum aesthetics.

7. Closer Accessories: Provide door closer accessories including custom templates, special mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates as required for proper installation. Provide through-bolt and security type fasteners as specified in the hardware sets.


B. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 surface mounted, heavy duty door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron or aluminum alloy body construction, with adjustable backcheck and separate non-critical valves for closing sweep and latch speed control. Provide non-handed units standard. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) – DC6000 Series. b. LCN Closers (LC) - 4040 Series. c. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 1431 Series d. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 351 Series.

2.12 ELECTROMECHANICAL DOOR OPERATORS A. General: Provide low energy operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size,

weight, and movement; for condition of exposure; and for compliance with UL 325. Coordinate operator mechanisms with door operation, hinges, and activation devices. 1. Fire-Rated Doors: Provide door operators for fire-rated door assemblies that comply with

NFPA 80 for fire-rated door components and are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency.

B. Standard: Certified ANSI/BHMA A156.19. C. Performance Requirements:

1. Opening Force if Power Fails: Not more than 15 lbf required to release a latch if provided, not more than 30 lbf required to manually set door in motion, and not more than 15 lbf required to fully open door.

2. Entrapment Protection: Not more than 15 lbf required to prevent stopped door from closing or opening.

D. Configuration: Surface mounted or in-ground as required. Door operators to control single swinging and pair of swinging doors.

E. Operation: Power opening and spring closing operation capable of meeting ANSI A117.1 accessibility guideline. Provide time delay for door to remain open before initiating closing cycle as required by ANSI/BHMA A156.19.

F. Features: Operator units to have full feature adjustments for door opening and closing force and speed, backcheck, motor assist acceleration from 0 to 30 seconds, time delay, vestibule interface delay, obstruction recycle, and hold open time from 0 up to 30 seconds.

G. Provide outputs and relays on board the operator to allow for coordination of exit device latch retraction, electric strikes, magnetic locks, card readers, safety and motion sensors and specified auxiliary contacts.

H. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard, fabricated from aluminum with nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

I. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

2.13 ELECTROHYDRAULIC DOOR OPERATORS A. General: Provide low energy operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size,

weight, and movement; for condition of exposure; and for compliance with UL 325. Coordinate operator mechanisms with door operation, hinges, and activation devices. 1. Fire-Rated Doors: Provide door operators for fire-rated door assemblies that comply with

NFPA 80 for fire-rated door components and are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency.


B. Standard: Certified ANSI/BHMA A156.19. C. Performance Requirements:

1. Opening Force if Power Fails: Not more than 15 lbf required to release a latch if provided, not more than 30 lbf required to manually set door in motion, and not more than 15 lbf required to fully open door.

2. Entrapment Protection: Not more than 15 lbf required to prevent stopped door from closing or opening.

D. Configuration: Surface mounted or in-ground as required. Door operators to control single swinging and pair of swinging doors.

E. Certification: Furnish Operators with GreenCircle Certification. F. Operation: Power opening and spring closing operation capable of meeting ANSI A117.1

accessibility guideline. Provide time delay for door to remain open before initiating closing cycle as required by ANSI/BHMA A156.19. When not in automatic mode, door operator to function as manual door closer with fully adjustable opening and closing forces, with or without electrical power.

G. Features: Operator units to have full feature adjustments for door opening and closing force and speed, backcheck, motor assist acceleration from 0 to 30 seconds, time delay, vestibule interface delay, obstruction recycle, and hold open time from 0 up to 30 seconds.

H. Provide outputs and relays on board the operator to allow for coordination of exit device latch retraction, electric strikes, magnetic locks, card readers, safety and motion sensors and specified auxiliary contacts.

I. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard, fabricated from aluminum with nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

J. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. LCN Closers (LC) - 4640 Series. 2. Norton Door Controls (NO) - 6000 Series. 3. Stanley Security Solutions (ST) – D-4990 Series.

2.14 ELECTRONIC ACCESSORIES A. Exit Delay Locking Systems: Exit delay locking systems are fully integrated units consisting of a

minimum 1200 pound holding force magnetic lock, movement initiating device, reset bypass switch, and exit delay timer module. Unit to include an adjustable initiation gap allowing door travel of up to 1 inch before going into alarm condition. Operates on either 12VDC or 24VDC. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Security Door Controls (SD) - 101 Exit Check Series. b. Securitron (SU) - iMXD Series. c. Schlage Electronic Security (SE)

B. Power Supplies: Provide Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory Listed 12VDC or 24VDC (field selectable) filtered and regulated power supplies. Include battery backup option with integral battery charging capability in addition to operating the DC load in event of line voltage failure. Provide the least number of units, at the appropriate amperage level, sufficient to exceed the required total draw for the specified electrified hardware and access control equipment. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - BPS Series. b. Security Door Controls (SD) - 630 Series. c. Securitron (SU) - BPS Series.


d. Von Duprin (VD) - PS. 2.15 KEY CONTROLS

A. Key Management System: For each keyed lock on project, provide one set of consecutively numbered duplicate key tags with hanging hole and snap catch. 1. Security Key Tags: For each keyed lock on project, provide one set of matching key tags

for permanent attachment to one key of each set. B. Facility Manager's Key Cabinet: Sheet steel construction, piano hinged door with key lock.

1. Mounting: Wall-mounted. 2. Capacity: Actual quantity of keys, plus 25 percent additional capacity. 3. Size key hooks to hold 6 keys each. 4. Finish: Baked enamel, manufacturer's standard color.


A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work; labeled, fire-rated doors and frames are present and properly installed, and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.

B. Verify that electric power is available to power operated devices and of the correct characteristics.

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable codes. B. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer. C. Install hardware on fire-rated doors and frames in accordance with code and NFPA 80. D. Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware item. As indicated

in the following list; unless noted otherwise in Door Hardware Sets Schedule or on the drawings. 1. For Steel Doors and Frames: Refer to Section 08 1113. 2. For Wood Doors: Comply with DHI WDHS.3 "Recommended Locations for Architectural

Hardware for Flush Wood Doors". 3. Wood Doors: Refer to Section 08 1416. 4. Wood Doors: Refer to Section 08 1433. 5. Locksets: 38 inch. 6. Dead Locks: 48 inch.

3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements. B. Adjust hardware for smooth operation.

3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout

Requirements. B. Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or finish.

3.05 SCHEDULE – ATTACHED [ON DRAWINGS]

END OF SECTION

http://www.dhi.org/publications/index.asp


08 8000 - 1 GLAZING

SECTION 08 8000 GLAZING


A. Insulating glass units. B. Glazing units. C. Glazing compounds and accessories.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; current edition. B. ASTM E2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation;

2010. C. GANA (SM) - GANA Sealant Manual; 2008. D. NFRC 100 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U-factors; 2014. E. NFRC 200 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain Coefficient and

Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence; 2014. F. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data on Glazing Compounds and Accessories: Provide chemical, functional, and

environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements, and identify available colors.

B. Samples: Submit two samples 12 by 12 inch in size of glass units. C. Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been

completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with at least three years documented experience.

1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F.

1.07 WARRANTY A. Insulating Glass Units: Provide a five (5) year manufacturer warranty to include coverage for

seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, including providing products to replace failed units. B. Laminated Glass: Provide a five (5) year manufacturer warranty to include coverage for

delamination, including providing products to replace failed units. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Glass Fabricators: B. Float Glass Manufacturers:

1. AGC Glass North America, Inc. : www.agcglass.com/#sle. 2. Cardinal Glass Industries: www.cardinalcorp.com/#sle. 3. Guardian Glass, LLC: www.guardianglass.com/#sle. 4. Pilkington North America Inc: www.pilkington.com/na/#sle.

C. Fire-Protection-Rated Glass: Provide products as required to achieve indicated fire-rating period. 1. Manufacturers:

a. SAFTIFIRST, a division of O'Keeffe's Inc; SuperClear 45-HS: www.safti.com/#sle.



http://www.glasswebsite.com/

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NFRC%20100




08 8000 - 2 GLAZING

b. Technical Glass Products: www.fireglass.com/#sle. c. Vetrotech North America; Contraflam 45: www.vetrotechusa.com/#sle.

2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS - EXTERIOR GLAZING ASSEMBLIES A. Provide type and thickness of exterior glazing assemblies to support assembly dead loads, and

to withstand live loads caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of glass. 1. Comply with ASTM E1300 for design load resistance of glass type, thickness, dimensions,

and maximum lateral deflection of supported glass. 2. Provide glass edge support system sufficiently stiff to limit the lateral deflection of

supported glass edges to less than 1/175 of their lengths under specified design load. 3. Glass thicknesses listed are minimum.

B. Thermal and Optical Performance: Provide exterior glazing products with performance properties as indicated. Performance properties are in accordance with manufacturer's published data as determined with the following procedures and/or test methods: 1. Center of Glass U-Value: Comply with NFRC 100 using Lawrence Berkeley National

Laboratory (LBNL) WINDOW 6.3 computer program. 2. Center of Glass Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Comply with NFRC 200 using

Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (LBNL) WINDOW 6.3 computer program. 3. Solar Optical Properties: Comply with NFRC 300 test method.

2.03 GLASS MATERIALS A. Float Glass: Provide float glass based glazing unless otherwise indicated.

1. Annealed Type: ASTM C1036, Type I - Transparent Flat, Class 1 - Clear, Quality - Q3. 2. Impact Resistant Safety Glass: Complies with ANSI Z97.1 - Class B, or 16 CFR 1201 -

Category I criteria. B. Laminated Glass: Float glass laminated in accordance with ASTM C1172.

1. Laminated Safety Glass: Complies with ANSI Z97.1 - Class B or 16 CFR 1201 - Category I impact test requirements.

2. Polyvinyl Butyl (PVB) Interlayer: 0.030 inch thick, minimum. 2.04 INSULATING GLASS UNITS

A. Insulating Glass Units: Types as indicated. 1. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E2190. 2. Coated Glass: Comply with requirements of ASTM C1376 for pyrolytic (hard-coat) or

magnetic sputter vapor deposition (soft-coat) type coatings on flat glass; coated vision glass, Kind CV; coated overhead glass, Kind CO; or coated spandrel glass, Kind CS.

3. Metal Edge Spacers: Aluminum, bent and soldered corners. 4. Spacer Color: Black. 5. Edge Seal:

a. Color: Black. 6. Purge interpane space with dry air, hermetically sealed.

B. Insulating Glass Units: Vision glass, double glazed. 1. Applications: Exterior glazing unless otherwise indicated. 2. Space between lites filled with argon. 3. Outboard Lite: Annealed float glass, 1/4 inch thick, minimum.

a. Tint: Gray. b. Coating: Low-E (passive type), on #2 surface.

4. Inboard Lite: Annealed float glass, 1/4 inch thick, minimum. a. Tint: Clear.

5. Total Thickness: 1 inch. 6. Thermal Transmittance (U-Value), Summer - Center of Glass: .24 , nominal. 7. Visible Light Transmittance (VLT): 54 percent, nominal. 8. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): .28 , nominal.




http://www.nfrc.org/


http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ANSI%20Z97.1



http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ANSI%20Z97.1





08 8000 - 3 GLAZING

2.05 GLAZING UNITS A. Monolithic Interior Vision Glazing:

1. Applications: Interior glazing unless otherwise indicated. 2. Glass Type: Annealed float glass. 3. Tint: Clear. 4. Thickness: 1/4 inch, nominal.

B. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing: Type, thickness, and configuration of glazing that contains flame, smoke, and does not block radiant heat, as required to achieve fire-doors indicated fire-rating period of 90 minutes or less. 1. Applications:

a. Glazing in fire-rated door assembly. b. Glazing in fire-rated window assembly.

2. Provide products listed by ITS (DIR) or UL (DIR) and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Safety Glazing Certification: 16 CFR 1201 Category II. 4. Fire-Rating Period: As indicated on drawings. C. Type 6 - Resin Panels or Glass (Type A)

1. Application: 60° awnings 2. Products: 3form KodaXT 3. Gauge: ½” 4. Coating or Add-on: UV Block. 5. Edges and holes: sealed as recommended by manufacturer 6. Color: n-04 7. Finish: Vellum 8. Glass: .5” tempered laminated glass with Viracon “Vanceva” (or equal) tinted laminate,

selected from manufacturer’s standard colors. Bent glass where shown on drawings. Frosted on bottom surface.

9. Locations: See drawings. D. Type 7 - Resin Panels or Glass (Type B)

1. Application: Canopies over entries 2. Products: 3form KodaXT 3. Gauge: ½” 4. Coating or Add-on: UV Block. 5. Edges and holes: sealed as recommended by manufacturer 6. Color: o-01 7. Finish: Vellum 8. Glass: .5” tempered laminated glass with Viracon “Vanceva” (or equal) tinted laminate,


9. Locations: See drawings. E. Type 8 - Resin Panels or Glass (Type C)

1. Application: Soffits at entry vestibules & canopies over entries 2. Products: 3form KodaXT 3. Gauge: ½” 4. Coating or Add-on: UV Block. 5. Edges and holes: sealed as recommended by manufacturer 6. Color: b-02 7. Finish: Vellum 8. Glass: .5” tempered laminated glass with Viracon “Vanceva” (or equal) tinted laminate,


9. Locations: See drawings.



08 8000 - 4 GLAZING

2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Setting Blocks: Silicone, with 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness; ASTM C864 Option II.

Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch by width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch by height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area.

B. Glazing Splines: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; ASTM C864 Option II; color black.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS

A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners.

B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and support framing is ready to receive glazing system.

3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with appropriate solvent and wipe dry immediately before glazing.

Remove coatings that are not tightly bonded to substrates. B. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant where required for proper sealant adhesion.

3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install glazing in compliance with written instructions of glass, gaskets, and other glazing

material manufacturers, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in glazing referenced standards.

B. Install glazing sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193, GANA (SM), and manufacturer's instructions.

C. Prevent glass from contact with any contaminating substances that may be the result of construction operations such as, and not limited to the following; weld splatter, fire-safing, plastering, mortar droppings, etc.

3.04 INSTALLATION - DRY GLAZING METHOD (GASKET GLAZING) A. Application - Exterior and/or Interior Glazed: Set glazing infills from either the exterior or the

interior of the building. B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inch from corners. C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure on gasket to

attain full contact. D. Install removable stops without displacing glazing gasket; exert pressure for full continuous

contact. 3.05 INSTALLATION - DRY GLAZING METHOD (TAPE AND GASKET SPLINE GLAZING)

A. Application - Exterior Glazed: Set glazing infills from the exterior of the building. B. Cut glazing tape to length; install on glazing pane. Seal corners by butting tape and sealing

junctions with butyl sealant. C. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inch from corners. D. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure to attain full

contact. E. Install removable stops without displacing glazing spline. Exert pressure for full continuous

contact. F. Carefully trim protruding tape with knife.

3.06 INSTALLATION - PRESSURE GLAZED SYSTEMS A. Application - Exterior Glazed: Set glazing infills from exterior side of building.


http://www.glasswebsite.com/


08 8000 - 5 GLAZING

B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inch from corners. C. Install pressure plates without displacing glazing gasket; exert pressure for full continuous

contact. D. Install cover plate.

3.07 CLEANING A. Remove excess glazing materials from finish surfaces immediately after application using

solvents or cleaners recommended by manufacturers. B. Remove non-permanent labels immediately after glazing installation is complete. C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces after sealants are fully cured. D. Clean glass on both exposed surfaces not more than 4 days prior to Date of Substantial

Completion in accordance with glass manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.08 PROTECTION

A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste; do not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units.

B. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period prior to Date of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION


09 2116 - 1 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

SECTION 09 2116 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES


A. Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies. B. Metal stud wall framing. C. Metal channel ceiling framing. D. Acoustic insulation. E. Cementitious backing board. F. Gypsum wallboard. G. Joint treatment and accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 4000 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Exterior wind-load-bearing metal stud framing. B. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution requirements. C. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping: Top-of-wall assemblies at fire rated walls. D. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing acoustical gaps in construction other than gypsum

board or plaster work. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. AISI S100-12 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members; American Iron and Steel Institute; 2012.

B. ANSI A118.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Test Methods and Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2016).

C. ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board; 2015.

D. ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2013. E. ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel

Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness; 2015.

F. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2014.

G. ASTM C1280 - Standard Specification for Application of Exterior Gypsum Panel Products for Use as Sheathing; 2013a.

H. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2014a. I. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound

Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2009. J. ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2010. K. GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2013. L. GA-600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual; 2015.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, accessories, and joint finishing

system. C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on partition head to structure connectors, showing

compliance with requirements.

http://www.steel.org/

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ANSI%20A108/A118/A136









http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=GA%20216




1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board installation and

finishing, with minimum 5 years of experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216. B. Interior Partitions, Indicated as Acoustic: Provide completed assemblies with the following

characteristics: 1. Acoustic Attenuation: STC as indicated calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based

on tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90. C. Shaft Walls at HVAC Shafts: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics:

1. Air Pressure Within Shaft: Sustained loads of 5 lbf/sq ft with maximum mid-span deflection of L/240.

2. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 40-44 calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based on tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90.

D. Fire Rated Assemblies: Provide completed assemblies complying with applicable code. 1. UL Assembly Numbers: Provide construction equivalent to that listed for the particular

assembly in the current UL (FRD). 2. Gypsum Association File Numbers: Comply with requirements of GA-600 for the

particular assembly. 2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers - Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories: 1. ClarkDietrich : www.clarkdietrich.com/#sle. 2. Dietrich Metal Framing; www.dietrichindustries.com. 3. National Gypsum Company; www.nationalgypsum.com.

B. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 for the spacing indicated, with maximum deflection of wall framing of L/120 at 5 psf. 1. Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs. 2. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs. 3. Ceiling Channels: C-shaped. 4. Furring: Hat-shaped sections, minimum depth of 7/8 inch. 5. Resilient Furring Channels: Single or double leg configuration; 1/2 inch channel depth.

C. Shaft Wall Studs and Accessories: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 and specified performance requirements.

D. Partition Head to Structure Connections: Provide mechanical anchorage devices that accommodate deflection using slotted holes, screws and anti-friction bushings, preventing rotation of studs while maintaining structural performance of partition. 1. Structural Performance: Maintain lateral load resistance and vertical movement capacity

required by applicable code, when evaluated in accordance with AISI S100-12. 2. Material: ASTM A653/A653M steel sheet, SS Grade 50/340, with G60/Z180 hot dipped

galvanized coating. 3. Provide components UL-listed for use in UL-listed fire-rated head of partition joint systems

indicated on drawings. 4. Provide top track preassembled with connection devices spaced to fit stud spacing

indicated on drawings; minimum track length of 12 feet. 2.03 BOARD MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers - Gypsum-Based Board: 1. American Gypsum Company : www.americangypsum.com/#sle. 2. CertainTeed Corporation : www.certainteed.com/#sle.













http://www.steel.org/




3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum : www.gpgypsum.com/#sle. 4. National Gypsum Company : www.nationalgypsum.com/#sle. 5. USG Corporation : www.usg.com/#sle.

B. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Glass mat faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1658/C1658M, suitable for paint

finish, of the same core type and thickness may be substituted for paper-faced board. 3. Unfaced fiber-reinforced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1278/C1278M, suitable for

paint finish, of the same core type and thickness may be substituted for paper-faced board.

4. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. a. Mold-resistant board is required whenever board is being installed before the building

is enclosed and conditioned. 5. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Rating: Use type required by indicated tested

assembly; if no tested assembly is indicated, use Type X board, UL or WH listed. 6. Thickness:

a. Vertical Surfaces: 5/8 inch. b. Ceilings: 5/8 inch.

7. Mold Resistant Paper Faced Products: a. American Gypsum Company; M-Bloc. b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock Mold-Guard. c. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock Fireguard X Mold-Guard. d. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond XP Gypsum Board.

C. Impact Resistant Wallboard: 1. Application: High-traffic areas indicated. 2. Surface Abrasion: Level 3, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM

C1629/C1629M. 3. Indentation: Level 1, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM C1629/C1629M. 4. Soft Body Impact: Level 3, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM

C1629/C1629M. 5. Hard Body Impact: Level 2, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM

C1629/C1629M. 6. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. 7. Paper-Faced Type: Gypsum wallboard as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M. 8. Type: Fire resistance rated Type X, UL or WH listed. 9. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 10. Edges: Tapered.

D. Backing Board For Wet Areas: One of the following products: 1. Application: Surfaces behind tile in wet areas including tub and shower surrounds,

shower and ceilings. 2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. 3. ANSI Cement-Based Board: Non-gypsum-based; aggregated Portland cement panels

with glass fiber mesh embedded in front and back surfaces complying with ANSI A118.9 or ASTM C1325. a. Thickness: 1/2 inch. b. Products:

1) National Gypsum Company; PermaBase Cement Board: www.nationalgypsum.com/#sle.

2) USG Corporation : www.usg.com/#sle. E. Exterior Sheathing Board: Sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut.

1. Application: Exterior sheathing, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Edges: Square.



















2.04 GYPSUM WALLBOARD ACCESSORIES A. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, unfaced. Thickness: 2

inch. B. Acoustic Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex or water-based elastomeric sealant; do not use

solvent-based non-curing butyl sealant. C. Finishing Accessories: ASTM C1047, galvanized steel or rolled zinc, unless noted otherwise.

1. Types: As detailed or required for finished appearance. D. Joint Materials: ASTM C475/C475M and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for

project conditions. 1. Fiberglass Tape: 2 inch wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners, except as

otherwise indicated. 2. Paper Tape: 2 inch wide, creased paper tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise

indicated. 3. Joint Compound: Setting type, field-mixed.

E. Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Cold-Formed Steel Studs Less than 0.033 inch in Thickness and Wood Members: ASTM C1002; self-piercing tapping screws, corrosion resistant.

F. Adhesive for Attachment to Wood, ASTM C557 and Metal: 1. Products:

a. Franklin International, Inc; Titebond PROvantage Professional Drywall Adhesive: www.titebond.com/#sle.


A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence. 3.02 SHAFT WALL INSTALLATION

A. Shaft Wall Framing: Install in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. 1. Fasten runners to structure with short leg to finished side, using appropriate power-driven

fasteners at not more than 24 inches on center. 2. Install studs at spacing required to meet performance requirements.

B. Shaft Wall Liner: Cut panels to accurate dimension and install sequentially between special friction studs. 1. On walls over sixteen feet high, screw-attach studs to runners top and bottom. 2. Seal perimeter of shaft wall and penetrations with acoustical sealant.

3.03 FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions. B. Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members as indicated.

1. Level ceiling system to a tolerance of 1/600. 2. Laterally brace entire suspension system. 3. Install bracing as required at exterior locations to resist wind uplift.

C. Studs: Space studs as indicated. 1. Extend partition framing to structure where indicated and to ceiling in other locations. 2. Partitions Terminating at Ceiling: Attach ceiling runner securely to ceiling track in

accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach top runner to structure, maintain clearance

between top of studs and structure, and connect studs to track using specified mechanical devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; verify free movement of top of stud connections; do not leave studs unattached to track.

D. Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels, using not less than double studs at jambs.








E. Standard Wall Furring: Install at concrete walls scheduled to receive gypsum board, not more than 4 inches from floor and ceiling lines and abutting walls. Secure in place on alternate channel flanges at maximum 24 inches on center.

F. Acoustic Furring: Install resilient channels at maximum 24 inches on center. Locate joints over framing members.

G. Furring for Fire Ratings: Install as required for fire resistance ratings indicated and to GA-600 requirements.

H. Blocking: Install wood blocking for support of: 1. Framed openings. 2. Wall mounted cabinets. 3. Plumbing fixtures. 4. Toilet partitions. 5. Toilet accessories. 6. Wall mounted door hardware.

3.04 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around

electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. B. Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1. Place two beads continuously on substrate before installation of perimeter framing members.

2. Seal around all penetrations by conduit, pipe, ducts, and rough-in boxes, except where firestopping is provided.

3.05 BOARD INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C840, GA-216, and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end

joints, especially in highly visible locations. B. Double-Layer Non-Rated: Use gypsum board for first layer, placed parallel to framing or furring

members, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. Place second layer perpendicular to framing or furring members. Offset joints of second layer from joints of first layer.

C. Fire-Rated Construction: Install gypsum board in strict compliance with requirements of assembly listing.

D. Exterior Sheathing: Comply with ASTM C1280. Install sheathing vertically, with edges butted tight and ends occurring over firm bearing. 1. Paper-Faced Sheathing: Immediately after installation, protect from weather by

application of water-resistive barrier. E. Cementitious Backing Board: Install over steel framing members and wood framing members

where indicated, in accordance with ANSI A108.11-SystemDeleted and manufacturer's instructions.

3.06 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as follows:

1. Not more than 30 feet apart on walls and ceilings over 50 feet long. B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths. C. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials.

3.07 JOINT TREATMENT A. Glass Mat Faced Gypsum Board and Exterior Glass Mat Faced Sheathing: Use fiberglass joint

tape, embed and finish with setting type joint compound. B. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows:

1. Level 5: Walls and ceilings to receive semi-gloss or gloss paint finish and other areas specifically indicated.






2. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Level 3: Walls to receive textured wall finish. 4. Level 2: In utility areas, behind cabinetry, and on backing board to receive tile finish. 5. Level 1: Wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the completed

construction. C. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to

receive finishes. 1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch.

D. Where Level 5 finish is indicated, spray apply high build drywall surfacer over entire surface after joints have been properly treated; achieve a flat and tool mark-free finish.

E. Fill and finish joints and corners of cementitious backing board as recommended by manufacturer.

3.08 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet

in any direction. END OF SECTION


09 3000 - 1 TILING

SECTION 09 3000 TILING


A. Tile for floor applications. B. Ceramic accessories. C. Ceramic trim.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between tile work and adjacent construction

and fixtures. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ANSI A108/A118/A136 - American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile (Compendium); 2017.

B. ANSI A108.1b - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).

C. ANSI A108.12 - American National Standard for Installation of Ceramic Tile with EGP (Exterior Glue Plywood) Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).

D. ANSI A118.1 - American National Standard Specifications for Dry-Set Cement Mortar; 2012 (Revised).

E. ANSI A137.1 - American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile; 2013.1. 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide manufacturers' data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and accessories. Include instructions for using grouts and adhesives.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate color arrangement, perimeter conditions, junctions with dissimilar materials, thresholds, ceramic accessories, and setting details.

C. Samples: Mount tile and apply grout on two plywood panels, minimum 18 by 18 inches in size illustrating pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations.

D. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, and stain removal methods.

E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. Extra Tile: 10 square feet of each size, color, and surface finish combination.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain one copy of and ANSI A108/A118/A136 and TCNA (HB) on site. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products

specified in this section, with minimum five years of documented experience. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum of

five years of documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install solvent-based products in an unventilated environment. B. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F during installation of mortar

materials.

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ANSI%20A108/A118/A136





https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ANSI%20A108/A118/A136

http://www.tcnatile.com/


09 3000 - 2 TILING

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TILE

A. Manufacturers: All products by the same manufacturer. 1. American Olean Corporation: www.americanolean.com/#sle. 2. Dal-Tile Corporation: www.daltile.com/#sle.

B. Ceramic Mosaic Tile, Type __: ANSI A137.1, standard grade. 1. Size: 1 by 1 inch, nominal. 2. Shape: Square. 3. Edges: Square. 4. Surface Finish: Unglazed. 5. Color(s): To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 6. Trim Units: Matching bead, cove, and surface bullnose shapes in sizes coordinated with

field tile. 2.02 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES

A. Ceramic Trim: Matching bullnose, double bullnose, cove base, and cove ceramic shapes in sizes coordinated with field tile.

B. Thresholds: Marble, white or gray, honed finish; 2 inches wide by full width of wall or frame opening; 1/2 inch thick; beveled one long edge with radiused corners on top side; without holes, cracks, or open seams. 1. Applications:

a. At doorways where tile terminates. b. At open edges of floor tile where adjacent finish is a different height.

2.03 SETTING MATERIALS A. Manufacturers:

1. Bostik Inc;: www.bostik-us.com/#sle. 2. LATICRETE International, Inc; : www.laticrete.com/#sle. 3. TEC, an H.B. Fuller Construction Products Brand: www.tecspecialty.com/#sle.

B. Improved Latex-Portland Cement Mortar Bond Coat: ANSI A118.15. 1. Applications: Use this type of bond coat where indicated and where no other type of bond

coat is indicated. 2. Products:

a. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE 254 Platinum: www.laticrete.com/#sle. b. TEC, an H.B. Fuller Construction Products Brand; TEC 3N1 Performance Mortar:

www.tecspecialty.com/#sle. 2.04 GROUTS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Bostik Inc;: www.bostik-us.com/#sle. 2. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE PERMACOLOR Grout:

www.laticrete.com/#sle. 3. Merkrete, by Parex USA, Inc; Merkrete Duracolor Non-Sanded Color Grout:

www.merkrete.com/#sle. 4. TEC, an H.B. Fuller Construction Products Brand: www.tecspecialty.com/#sle.

B. High Performance Polymer Modified Grout: ANSI A118.7 polymer modified cement grout. 1. Applications: Use this type of grout where indicated and where no other type of grout is

indicated. 2. Use sanded grout for joints 1/8 inch wide and larger; use unsanded grout for joints less

than 1/8 inch wide. 3. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line. 4. Products:

a. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE PERMACOLOR Grout: www.laticrete.com/#sle.

http://www.tcnatile.com/products-and-services/publications.html



09 3000 - 3 TILING

b. Merkrete, by Parex USA, Inc; Merkrete Pro Grout: www.merkrete.com/#sle. c. TEC, an H.B. Fuller Construction Products Brand; TEC AccuColor Plus Grout:

www.tecspecialty.com/#sle. C. Standard Grout: ANSI A118.6 standard cement grout.

1. Applications: Use this type of grout where indicated and where no other type of grout is indicated.

2. Use sanded grout for joints 1/8 inch wide and larger; use unsanded grout for joints less than 1/8 inch wide.

3. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line. 4. Products:

a. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE 1500 Sanded Grout: www.laticrete.com/#sle.

b. Merkrete, by Parex USA, Inc; Merkrete Duracolor Non-Sanded Grout: www.merkrete.com/#sle.

2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Concrete Floor Slab Crack Isolation Membrane: Material complying with ANSI A118.12; not

intended as waterproofing. 1. Crack Resistance: No failure at 1/16 inch gap, minimum. 2. Products:

a. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE Blue 92 Anti-Fracture Membrane: www.laticrete.com/#sle.

b. Merkrete, by Parex USA, Inc; Merkrete Fracture Guard: www.merkrete.com/#sle. c. Proflex Products, Inc; Maxxim Sim-40: www.proflex.us/#sle.


A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive tile.

B. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of setting materials to sub-floor surfaces.

D. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location. 3.02 PREPARATION

A. Protect surrounding work from damage. B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean. C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable

flatness tolerances. D. Prepare substrate surfaces for adhesive installation in accordance with adhesive

manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Install tile, thresholds, and stair treads and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1a through ANSI A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and TCNA (HB) recommendations.

B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. C. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases

neatly. Align floor joints. D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make

grout joints without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout, or too little grout. E. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed. F. Install non-ceramic trim in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.







09 3000 - 4 TILING

G. Install thresholds where indicated. H. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. I. Keep control and expansion joints free of mortar, grout, and adhesive. J. Prior to grouting, allow installation to completely cure; minimum of 48 hours. K. Grout tile joints unless otherwise indicated. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated.

3.04 INSTALLATION - FLOORS - THIN-SET METHODS A. Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method F113, dry-set

or latex-Portland cement bond coat, with standard grout, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use uncoupling membrane under all tile unless other underlayment is indicated. 2. Where waterproofing membrane is indicated, install in accordance with TCNA (HB)

Method F122, with latex-Portland cement grout. 3. Where epoxy bond coat and grout are indicated, install in accordance with TCNA (HB)

Method F131. B. Install tile-to-tile floor movement joints in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method EJ171F.

3.05 CLEANING A. Clean tile and grout surfaces.

3.06 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation.

END OF SECTION





1961 RTA WSP RENOVATIONS 09 5100 - 1 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS DESIGN GROUP 3, LLC

SECTION 09 5100 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS


A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system. B. Removing and reinstalling wire mesh ”panels”

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products; 2014.

1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed,

sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved.

B. Do not install acoustical units until after interior wet work is dry. 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components. C. Samples: Submit two full size samples illustrating material and finish of metal grid. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and maximum humidity of 40 percent prior to, during, and after acoustical unit installation.


A. Suspension Systems: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc; www.armstrong.com/#sle. 2. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com/#sle. 3. Hunter Douglas Architectural: www.hunterdouglasarchitectural.com/#sle. 4. USG: www.usg.com/#sle.

2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM(S) A. Metal Suspension Systems - General: Complying with ASTM C635/C635M; die cut and

interlocking components, with stabilizer bars, clips, splices, perimeter moldings, and hold down clips as required.

B. Exposed Steel Suspension System: Formed steel, commercial quality cold rolled; heavy-duty. 1. Profile: Tee; 15/16 inch wide face. 2. Construction: Double web. 3. Finish: White painted.

2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, seismic

requirements, and ceiling system flatness requirement specified. B. Perimeter Moldings: Same material and finish as grid.

1. At Exposed Grid: Provide L-shaped molding for mounting at same elevation as face of grid.



1961 RTA WSP RENOVATIONS 09 5100 - 2 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS DESIGN GROUP 3, LLC


A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.

3.02 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Install suspension system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented

in this section. B. Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum

deflection of 1:360. C. Lay out system to a balanced grid design with edge units no less than 50 percent of acoustical

unit size. D. Locate system on room axis according to reflected plan. E. Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other

work. F. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where

carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. G. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest

affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance. H. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load

to exceed deflection capability. I. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, or

support components independently. J. Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners. K. Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with

other interruptions. 1. Use longest practical lengths. 2. Overlap and rivet corners.

3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees.

END OF SECTION


09 6623.16 - 1 EPOXY TERRAZZO

SECTION 09 66 23.16 EPOXY TERRAZZO

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Epoxy terrazzo with divider and accessory strips.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Concrete subfloor, Section 03 3000 2. Backing for poured in place epoxy terrazzo base shall be masonry or cement board

at least 1/2 inch thick.. 1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. NTMA: National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association, Inc. 1.03 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Pre installation Conference: The General Contractor shall conduct a conference at project site before Terrazzo Contractor begins installation. 1. The General Contractor shall invite Terrazzo Contractor, the Architect and

representatives of the Owner. 2. Review methods and procedures related to terrazzo including, but not limited to,

the following: a. Inspect and discuss condition of substrate and other preparatory work

performed by other trades. b. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials,

installer's personnel, equipment and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

c. Review terrazzo mixes and patterns. d. Review custom terrazzo mixes, designs and patterns. e. Coordination with the work of other installers.

1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Terrazzo Contractor shall submit Product Data for each type of product

required for installation including: 1. Strip materials. 2. Sealer.

B. Shop Drawings: Terrazzo Contractor shall prepare and submit Shop Drawings that include plans, elevations, sections, component details and attachments to other work. Include terrazzo installation requirements. Show layout of the following: 1. Divider strips. 2. Expansion joint strips. 3. Accessory strips. 4. Terrazzo patterns.

C. Samples: 1. Terrazzo Contractor shall prepare and submit a maximum of three samples, sizes

[12 by 12 inches] for each color and type of terrazzo specified.



1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Literature: Terrazzo Contractor shall submit two copies of maintenance

recommendations from NTMA. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Acceptable Epoxy Resin Manufacturer: An Associate Member of the NTMA, experienced in manufacturing epoxy resin in accordance with NTMA standards and with a record of successful in-service performance as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required materials.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Materials shall be delivered to Project site in supplier's original wrappings and

containers, labeled with source or manufacturer's name, material or product brand name, and lot number if any.

B. Materials shall be stored in their original, undamaged packages and containers, in a location where they will not be exposed to direct sunlight. 1. Epoxy components shall be stored in a space where the ambient temperature can

be maintained 60 and 90 deg. F before use. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Contractor shall provide sufficient water, temporary heat and light, and adequate electric power with suitable outlets connected and distributed for use within 100 feet of any working space.

B. Contractor shall provide temporary enclosures and other suitable methods to protect adjacent spaces from damage during installation. 1. Maintain ambient temperatures in the area to receive terrazzo at not less than

60 deg. F. 2. Maintain adequate ventilation in the area to receive terrazzo.

C. Terrazzo Contractor shall protect other adjacent work from water and dust generated by grinding operations.

1.09 GUARANTEE A. One year from date of substantial completion of terrazzo installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE

A. Epoxy Resin: 1. Test Specimens: Mix resin materials according to manufacturer's

recommendation without aggregate added and cure for 7 days at 75 degrees plus or minus 2 deg. F and 50 percent plus / minus 2 percent relative humidity.

2. Cured test specimens shall meet or exceed the following requirements: a. Hardness: 60 to 85 per ASTM D 2240, Shore D. b. Minimum Tensile Strength: 3000 psi per ASTM D 638 for a 2-inch specimen

made using a “C” die per ASTM D 412. c. Minimum Compressive Strength: 10,000 psi per ASTM D 695, Specimen B

cylinder. d. Chemical Resistance: No deleterious effects by contaminants listed below

after seven-day immersion at room temperature per ASTM D 1308. 1) Distilled Water. 2) Mineral Oil.



3) Isopropanol. 4) Ethanol. 5) Soap solution at 1 percent. 6) Sodium hydroxide at 10 percent solution. 7) Hydrochloric acid at 10 percent solution. 8) Hydrochloric acid at 30 percent solution. 9) Detergent Solution at 0.025. 10) Acetic Acid at 5 percent solution.

B. Epoxy Resin with Aggregate: 1. Test Specimens:

a. Mix epoxy resin according to manufacturer's recommendations and blend one volume of epoxy resin with 3 volumes of marble aggregate, consisting of: 1) 60 percent No. 1 chip. 2) 40 percent No. 0 chip.

b. Grind and grout with epoxy resin finished to a nominal 1/4-inch thickness. c. Cure specimens 7 days at 75 deg. F plus / minus 2 deg. and 50 percent plus

/ minus 2 percent relative humidity. 2. Cured epoxy terrazzo specimens shall nominally meet the following requirements:

a. Flammability: Self- extinguishing, extent of burning 1/4 inch maximum according to ASTM D 635.

b. Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion: 0.000025 inch/inch per deg F for temperature range of minus 12 to plus 140 deg F per ASTM D 696.

C. Bond Strength of Epoxy Terrazzo: 300 psi in concrete according to ASTM D7234 (modified to cut slightly into concrete).

2.02 MATERIALS A. Epoxy Resin Matrix: Two-component, high solids product complying with specified

performance requirements. 1. Color: As required for mix indicated.

B. Primer: As recommended, manufactured and supplied by epoxy resin manufacturer. C. Aggregates: [Marble]

1. Comply with NTMA gradation standards. 2. Abrasion and Impact Resistance: Loss of 40 percent or less when tested

according to ASTM C 131 (LA Abrasion). 3. Aggregates shall contain no deleterious or foreign matter.

D. Divider Strips: 1. Material: [Brass]. 2. Strip Thickness: 16 gauge. 3. Type: “L” strip: 3/8 inch by 1/2 inch.

2.03 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES A. Sealer: Terrazzo Contractor shall provide a non-ambering, clear sealer that is

chemically neutral; does not impair terrazzo aesthetics or physical properties; is recommended by terrazzo matrix manufacturer. Sealers shall comply with the following:



1. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Comply with ASTM D 2047. 3. Water Based Sealer Properties: With pH factor between 7 and 10.

B. Moisture Mitigation: Two-component, high solids, moisture tolerant, high density, low odor, epoxy-based product produced by epoxy terrazzo resin manufacturer specifically recommended to reduce alkalinity levels and moisture emission to acceptable levels.

C. Crack Suppression/Isolation Membrane: As recommended, produced and supplied by approved terrazzo resin formulator, having minimum 120 percent elongation potential per ASTM D 412.]

2.04 MIXES A. Terrazzo Selection: Terrazzo Contractor shall provide standard terrazzo mix(es)

according to the following: 1. Custom Mix Color and Pattern: [Match Architect's sample]

B. Proportions for Epoxy Terrazzo Topping: Comply with resin supplier’s recommendations.

C. Mixing of Terrazzo Topping: Mix epoxy components with aggregates in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.


A. The General Contractor and Architect shall examine substrates and areas, with Terrazzo Contractor present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the work. 1. Slab Flatness Tolerance: Subfloor is not to vary more than 1/4 inch from true

plane in a 10 foot span. 2. Cracks: Locate cracks and joints in concrete substrates. Verify location of control

joints and expansion joints in epoxy terrazzo flooring. a. If required to prevent cracks in concrete substrates transmitting through

epoxy terrazzo flooring, the Terrazzo Contractor shall make a written recommendation to install a crack suppression membrane and include specific recommendations on type and location.

B. The Terrazzo Contractor shall retain the services of an independent testing laboratory to verify that concrete substrates are dry by one of the methods below and moisture-vapor emissions are within acceptable levels according to epoxy resin manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with

installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement.

2. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with application of resinous flooring only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lbs. of water/1000 sq. ft. of slab area in 24 hours.

3. If required to prevent moisture vapor transmission in concrete substrates, the Terrazzo Contractor shall make a written recommendation to install moisture mitigation materials and include specific recommendations on type and location.

C. The Terrazzo Contractor shall be responsible for correcting non-conforming concrete substrates using materials compatible with epoxy terrazzo flooring system and as approved.



1. Materials used to correct nonconforming conditions must be compatible with the selected epoxy system and be approved by the manufacturer of epoxy resin materials.

D. Terrazzo Contractor shall proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions, including flatness tolerances, cracking, and excessive moisture vapor transmission have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION A. General Contractor shall broom clean area to receive terrazzo to remove loose chips

and all foreign matter. B. Terrazzo Contractor shall mechanically abrade concrete surface.

3.03 POURED-IN-PLACE TERRAZZO INSTALLATION A. Strip Materials: Terrazzo Contractor shall install strip materials as follows:

1. Divider and Control-Joint Strips: a. Locate divider strips in locations indicated. b. Install control joint strips back to back in locations indicated. c. Install strips in epoxy adhesive without voids below strips.

2. Accessory Strips: Install as required to provide a complete installation. B. Placing Terrazzo:

1. Prime subfloor in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Proportion and thoroughly blend the materials. 3. Place mixture to achieve specified thickness.

C. Poured in Place Terrazzo Base: Terrazzo Contractor shall provide mix color for terrazzo base to match approved mockup. 1. Terrazzo Contractor shall place and finish terrazzo base at the same time the

terrazzo floor is being installed. D. Finishing: Terrazzo Contractor shall finish the terrazzo topping as follows:

1. Rough Grinding: a. Grind with 24 or finer grit stones or with comparable diamond abrasives. b. Follow initial grind with 60/80 grit stones or with comparable diamond

abrasives. 2. Grouting:

a. Clean terrazzo with clean water and rinse. Allow to dry. b. Apply epoxy grout per manufacturer's instructions. c. Allow grout to cure.

3. Fine Grinding/Polishing: Grind with 120 grit or with comparable diamond abrasives until all grout is removed from surface.

E. Terrazzo Cleaning: Terrazzo Contractor shall clean finished terrazzo as follows: 1. Remove grinding residue from terrazzo surface. 2. Wash terrazzo surfaces immediately after final grinding of terrazzo flooring with

water and allow surfaces to dry thoroughly. F. Sealing: Terrazzo Contractor shall seal terrazzo according to sealer manufacturer’s

written instructions.



3.04 REPAIR A. Terrazzo Contractor shall repair terrazzo areas that evidence lack of bond between

topping and underbed according to NTMA’s written recommendations. 3.05 PROTECTION

A. After application of the sealer, the Work shall be ready for final inspection and acceptance by the Owner or his agent.

B. The General Contractor shall protect the finished floor after the Terrazzo Contractor has completed final grinding and applied sealer to terrazzo surfaces.

END OF SECTION


09 9123 - 1 PAINTING

SECTION 09 9123 PAINTING


A. Surface preparation. B. Field application of paints. C. Materials for backpriming woodwork. D. Scope: Finish interior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and unless

otherwise indicated, including the following: 1. Both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telecom equipment before

installing equipment. 2. Prime surfaces to receive wall coverings.

E. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1. Items factory-finished unless otherwise indicated; materials and products having factory-

applied primers are not considered factory finished. 2. Items indicated to receive other finishes. 3. Items indicated to remain unfinished. 4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, bar code labels, and

operating parts of equipment. 5. Stainless steel, anodized aluminum, bronze, terne coated stainless steel, and lead items. 6. Marble, granite, slate, and other natural stones. 7. Floors, unless specifically indicated. 8. Ceramic and other tiles. 9. Brick, architectural concrete, cast stone, integrally colored plaster and stucco. 10. Glass. 11. Concrete masonry units in utility, mechanical, and electrical spaces. 12. Acoustical materials, unless specifically indicated. 13. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Shop-primed items.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for

Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition. B. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications;

2016. C. ASTM D4258 - Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating; 2005

(Reapproved 2012). D. ASTM D4259 - Standard Practice for Abrading Concrete; 1988 (Reapproved 2012). E. ASTM D4260 - Standard Practice for Liquid and Gelled Acid Etching of Concrete; 2005

(Reapproved 2012). F. ASTM D4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and

Wood-Base Materials; 2007. G. CARB (SCM) - Suggested Control Measure for Architectural Coatings; California Air Resources

Board; 2007. H. MPI (APL) - Master Painters Institute Approved Products List; Master Painters and Decorators

Association; current edition, www.paintinfo.com. I. MPI (APSM) - Master Painters Institute Architectural Painting Specification Manual; Current

Edition, www.paintinfo.com.







http://www.arb.ca.gov/coatings/arch/Approved_2007_SCM.pdf

http://www.paintinfo.com/mpi/approved/index.htm

http://www.paintinfo.com/


09 9123 - 2 INTERIOR PAINTING

J. SCAQMD 1113 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1113; current edition. K. SSPC V1 (PM1) - Good Painting Practice: Painting Manual, Volume 1; Fourth Edition. L. SSPC V2 (PM2) - Systems and Specifications: Steel Structures Painting Manual, Volume 2;

Fourth Edition. M. SSPC-SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning; 2015. N. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; 1982 (Ed. 2004). O. SSPC-SP 3 - Power Tool Cleaning; 1982 (Ed. 2004). P. SSPC-SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning; 2007. Q. SSPC-SP 13 - Surface Preparation of Concrete; (Reaffirmed 2015); 2003.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide complete list of products to be used, with the following information for

each: 1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category

(e.g. "alkyd enamel"). 2. MPI product number (e.g. MPI #47). 3. Manufacturer's installation instructions.

B. Samples: Submit three paper "draw down" samples, 8-1/2 by 11 inches in size, illustrating range of colors available for each finishing product specified. 1. Where sheen is specified, submit samples in only that sheen. 2. Allow 30 days for approval process, after receipt of complete samples by Architect. 3. Paint color submittals will not be considered until color submittals for major materials not

to be painted, such as masonry, have been approved. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures. D. Maintenance Data: Submit data including finish schedule showing where each

product/color/finish was used, product technical data sheets, material safety data sheets (MSDS), care and cleaning instructions, touch-up procedures, repair of painted and finished surfaces, and color samples of each color and finish used.

E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. Extra Paint and Finish Materials: 1 gallon of each color; from the same product run, store

where directed. 2. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified with

minimum 3 years experience and approved by manufacturer. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand

code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing.

C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.

1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature

ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of

substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations. C. Do not apply materials when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5

degrees F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.


https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=SSPC%20V1

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=SSPC%20V2

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?&rid=BSD&input_doc_number=SSPC-Paint%2033&item_s_key=00093635&item_key_date=990329&org_code=SSPC&doc_type=TSDC&origin=SMDO

http://www.sspc.org/sspc-sp-2-hand-tool-cleaning.html

http://www.sspc.org/sspc-sp-3-power-tool-cleaning.html

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=SSPC%20SP%206

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=SSPC%20SP%2013



D. Minimum Application Temperatures for Paints: 50 degrees F for interiors unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.

E. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Provide paints and finishes used in any individual system from the same manufacturer; no exceptions.

B. Provide paints and finishes from the same manufacturer to the greatest extent possible. C. Paints:

1. Base Manufacturer: Sherwin-Williams Compant; www.sherwin-williams.com. 2. Behr Process Corporation: www.behr.com/#sle. 3. PPG Paints: www.ppgpaints.com/#sle. 4. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle.

D. Transparent Finishes: 1. Base Manufacturer: Sherwin-Williams Company; www.sherwin-williams.com.

E. Stains: 1. Base Manufacturer: Sherwin-Williams Company; www.sherwin-williams.com.

F. Primer Sealers: Same manufacturer as top coats. 2.02 PAINTS AND FINISHES - GENERAL

A. Paints and Finishes: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed paint. 1. Where MPI paint numbers are specified, provide products listed in Master Painters

Institute Approved Product List, current edition available at www.paintinfo.com, for specified MPI categories, except as otherwise indicated.

2. Provide paints and finishes of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.

B. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: 1. Provide paints and finishes that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in

the following: a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for

Architectural Coatings. b. Architectural coatings VOC limits of the State of Ohio.

C. Flammability: Comply with applicable code for surface burning characteristics. D. Sheens: Provide the sheens specified; where sheen is not specified, sheen will be selected

later by Architect from the manufacturer's full line. E. Colors: To be selected from manufacturer's full range of available colors.

1. Selection to be made by Architect after award of contract. 2. Allow for minimum of three colors for each system, unless otherwise indicated, without

additional cost to Owner. 2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIOR

A. Paint I-OP - Interior Surfaces to be Painted, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Including gypsum board, concrete, concrete masonry units, brick, wood, plaster, uncoated steel, shop primed steel, galvanized steel, and aluminum. 1. Two top coats and one coat primer. 2. Top Coat(s): High Performance Architectural Interior Latex; MPI #138, 139, 140, or 141. 3. Top Coat(s): Interior Latex; MPI #43, 44, 52, 53, 54, or 114. 4. Top Coat Sheen:

a. Flat: MPI gloss level 1; use this sheen for ceilings and other overhead surfaces. b. Eggshell: MPI gloss level 3; use this sheen at walls.




c. Semi-Gloss: MPI gloss level 5; use this sheen at all locations. d. Gloss: MPI gloss level 6; use this sheen at all locations.

5. Primer: As recommended by top coat manufacturer for specific substrate. B. Paint I-OP-MD-DT - Medium Duty Door/Trim: For surfaces subject to frequent contact by

occupants, including metals and wood: 1. Medium duty applications include doors, door frames, railings, handrails, guardrails, and

balustrades. 2. Two top coats and one coat primer. 3. Top Coat(s): Interior Epoxy-Modified Latex; MPI #115 or 215. 4. Top Coat(s): High Performance Architectural Interior Latex; MPI #139, 140, or 141. 5. Top Coat(s): Interior Alkyd; MPI #47, 48, 81, or 96. 6. Top Coat(s): Interior Alkyd, Water Based; MPI #167, 168, or 169.

a. Products: 7. Top Coat Sheen:

a. Eggshell: MPI gloss level 3; use this sheen at all locations. 8. Primer: As recommended by top coat manufacturer for specific substrate.

C. Paint WI-OP-3L - Wood, Opaque, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of latex primer sealer. 2. Eggshell: Two coats of latex enamel.

D. Paint CI-OP-3L - Concrete/Masonry, Opaque, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of block filler. 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel.

E. Paint CI-OP-2L - Concrete/Masonry, Opaque, Latex, 2 Coat: 1. One coat of block filler. 2. Semi-gloss: One coat of latex enamel.

F. Paint MI-OP-3L - Ferrous Metals, Unprimed, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of latex primer. 2. Gloss: Two coats of latex enamel. 3. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel.

G. Paint MI-OP-2L - Ferrous Metals, Primed, Latex, 2 Coat: 1. Touch-up with latex primer. 2. Gloss: Two coats of latex enamel. 3. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel.

H. Paint MgI-OP-3L - Galvanized Metals, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. One coat galvanize primer. 2. Gloss: Two coats of latex enamel. 3. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel.

I. Paint GI-OP-3L - Gypsum Board/Plaster, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of alkyd primer sealer. 2. Eggshell: Two coats of latex enamel.

J. Paint I-TR-F - Fire-Retardant Coating, Intumescent: 1. One coat of fire-retardant primer sealer.

2.04 PRIMERS A. Primers: Provide the following unless other primer is required or recommended by

manufacturer of top coats. 1. Alkali Resistant Water Based Primer; MPI #3. 2. Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler; MPI #4. 3. Interior Latex Primer Sealer; MPI #50. 4. Interior Water Based Primer for Galvanized Metal; MPI #134. 5. Stain Blocking Primer; MPI #136.



6. Stain Blocking Primer, Water Based; MPI #137. 7. Latex Primer for Interior Wood; MPI #39.

2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Accessory Materials: Provide primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding

materials, and clean-up materials as required for final completion of painted surfaces. B. Patching Material: Latex filler. C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.


A. Do not begin application of paints and finishes until substrates have been properly prepared. B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any

condition that may potentially effect proper application. D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory

preparation before proceeding. E. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. F. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply

finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 2. Plaster and Stucco: 12 percent. 3. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Masonry Units: 12 percent. 4. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442. 5. Concrete Floors and Traffic Surfaces: 8 percent.

3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to application. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best

result for the substrate under the project conditions. C. Remove or repair existing paints or finishes that exhibit surface defects. D. Remove surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,

escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. E. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat. F. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate

and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. G. Concrete:

1. Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be coated exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Clean concrete according to ASTM D4258. Allow to dry. 3. Prepare surface as recommended by top coat manufacturer and according to SSPC-SP

13. H. Masonry:

1. Prepare surface as recommended by top coat manufacturer. 2. Clean surfaces with pressurized water. Use pressure range of 600 to 1,500 psi at 6 to 12

inches. Allow to dry. I. Concrete Floors and Traffic Surfaces: Remove contamination, acid etch, and rinse floors with

clear water. Verify required acid-alkali balance is achieved. Allow to dry. J. Gypsum Board: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair.





K. Galvanized Surfaces: 1. Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent according to SSPC-SP 1. 2. Prepare surface according to SSPC-SP 2.

L. Ferrous Metal: 1. Solvent clean according to SSPC-SP 1. 2. Shop-Primed Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather

edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item.

3. Remove rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances using using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer and blast cleaning according to SSPC-SP 6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning". Protect from corrosion until coated.

M. Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation.

O. Metal Doors to be Painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces. 3.03 APPLICATION

A. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately.

B. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual".

C. Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is applied. D. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is

applied. E. Apply each coat to uniform appearance in thicknesses specified by manufacturer. F. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior

to applying next coat. G. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed

prior to finishing. 3.04 CLEANING

A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site.

3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes until completion of project. B. Touch-up damaged finishes after Substantial Completion.

3.06 SCHEDULE – SEE DRAWINGS END OF SECTION



1961 RTA WSP 2020 RENOVATIONS 10 7113 - 1 EXTERIOR SUN SHADES AND AWNINGS DESIGN GROUP 3, LLC

SECTION 10 7113 EXTERIOR SUN SHADES AND AWNINGS


A. Furnish and install architectural aluminum curtain wall complete with integral exterior sunshade device and related components as shown on drawings and specified in this section.

B. Furnish and install architectural stainless steel awnings, specialty glazing, and related components as shown on drawings and specified in this section.

C. Furnish and install architectural stainless steel glazing system and specialty glazing onto steel canopy frames (as specified and provided elsewhere) as shown on drawings and specified in this section or approved equal.

1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01 2300 – Alternates B. Section 08 4113 – Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts C. Section 08 4413 –Aluminum Glazed Curtain Walls D. Section 08 8000 – Glass and Glazing

1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Sunshade must be designed to resist:

1. 18 psf downward wind load. 2. 40 psf upward wind load. 3. 77 psf snow load

B. Awnings must be designed to resist: 1. 18 psf downward wind load. 2. 40 psf upward wind load. 3. 73 psf snow load

C. Sunshade and awning systems must be designed to transfer these loads to the “point of attachment.” Curtainwall system (specified elsewhere) must be designed to support full loads imposed by sunshades and awnings, and must provide attachment points to accommodate sunshade and awning application.

1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of attachment points and other construction contiguous

with awnings, sunshades, and canopies by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Contractor shall submit shop drawings; finish samples, test reports, and warranties.

1. Samples of materials as may be requested without cost to owner, i.e., metal, glazing, fasteners, anchors, frame sections, mullion section, corner section, etc.

B. Delegated Design: For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer, registered in the state of Ohio, responsible for their preparation.

1.06 WARRANTIES A. Workmanship

1. The responsible contractor shall assume full responsibility and warrant for one (1) year the satisfactory performance of the sunshade and awning systems. This includes the glazing, sunshade device anchorage and setting system, as per the specifications and approved shop drawings.


B. Window Material and Workmanship 1. Provide written guarantee against defects in material and workmanship for 3 years from the date

of final shipment. 2. Warranty period shall be for 20 years from the date of substantial completion. 3. Provide organic finish warranty based on AAMA standard 2605.


PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. In keeping with aesthetic design intent and project performance requirements, provide fully

engineered, custom sunshade and awning systems from the following approved list of manufacturers: 1. Architectural Grills and Sunshades (AGS, Inc.), Mokena, IL, www.agsshade.com 2. Bo-mar, Indianapolis, IN www.bo-marind.com 3. EFCO, Monett, MO www.efcocorp.com 4. Ruskin, Inc., Geneva, AL, www.ruskin.com 5. Sharchs, Ft. Worth, TX, www.sharchs.com 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Custom Awnings and Canopies: Architectural drawings display design intent for structures. While system provider is responsible for selecting proper component size to accommodate load requirements, aesthetic intent is not to be modified to meet this goal without written approval from the architect. 1. Stainless steel plate shall be 304 alloy with #4 brushed finish. 2. Stainless steel tube shall be 304 alloy with #4 brushed finish. 3. Stainless steel, point-supported glazing hardware. 4. Extruded aluminum shall be 6063-T6 alloy and temper. 5. Specialty Glazing: See Section 08 8000 – Glass and Glazing

B. Custom Sunshades: Architectural drawings display design intent for sunshade structures. While system provider is responsible for selecting proper components to accommodate load requirements, aesthetic intent is not to be modified to meet this goal without written approval from the architect.

1. Extruded aluminum 2” x 5” tube front fascia 2. Extruded aluminum 6” airfoil blades (seven) 3. Tapered plate aluminum outriggers 4. Overhead stainless steel support rods with turnbuckle hardware 5. Plate aluminum attachment brackets

6. Extruded aluminum shall be 6063-T6 alloy and temper. C. Anchors

1. Perimeter and floor line anchors shall be aluminum or steel. All steel anchors shall be properly insulated from the aluminum.

2.02 FABRICATION A. General

1. All aluminum horizontal extrusions (blades) shall have a minimum wall thickness of .063" (1.5 mm) to .125" (3 mm).

2. Sunshade and awning “arms” and mullion clips shall be extrusions with a nominal wall thickness of .25” (6 mm).

3. Fabrication may be welded with all welds blended architecturally, or non-welded with integral fastening and hair-line joints.

B. Glazing 1. “Glazing” shall be mechanically fastened by means of stainless steel stand-off brackets. All

stainless steel brackets shall be properly insulated from the aluminum. C. Finish

1. Finish for aluminum and/or stainless steel components shall be brushed, alumnum components shall be brushed and clear anodized.


A. Job Conditions 1. All openings shall be prepared by others to the proper size and shall be plumb, level, and in the

proper location and alignment as shown on the architect's drawings. Notify project architect prior to installation regarding any substrate conditions not meeting requirements, and do not proceed with installation until all necessary corrections to substrate have been completed.

2. Provide for manufacturer representation to conduct pre-installation site meeting.

http://www.agsshade.com/

http://www.bo-marind.com/

http://www.efcocorp.com/

http://www.ruskin.com/

http://www.sharchs.com/


3.02 INSTALLATION A. Use only skilled tradesmen with work done in accordance with approved shop drawings and

established specifications, and erect all curtain wall components to all building bench marks and column center lines.

B. Adequately anchor to maintain positions permanently when subjected to normal thermal movement, building movement, and specified wind loads.

C. Furnish and apply sealants to provide a weather tight installation at all joints and intersections and at opening perimeters. Wipe off excess material, leave all exposed surfaces and joints clean and smooth.

3.03 ANCHORAGE A. Adequately anchor to maintain positions permanently when subjected to normal thermal movement,

specified building movement, and specified wind loads. 3.04 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. The general contractor shall protect the aluminum materials and finish against damage from construction activities and harmful substances. The general contractor shall remove any protective coatings as directed by the architect, and shall clean the aluminum surfaces as recommended for the type of finish applied.

END OF SECTION

1961 RTA WSP 2020 RENOVATIONS 26 0500 - 1 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL DESIGN GROUP 3, LLC

SECTION 26 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE

A. Furnish all materials, labor, tools, transportation, incidentals and appurtenances to complete in every detail and leave in working order all items of work called for herein or shown on the accompanying Drawings.

B. Include any minor items of work necessary to provide a complete and fully operational electrical system.

1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:

1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation. 2. Sleeves for raceways and cables. 3. Sleeve seals. 4. Grout. 5. Common electrical installation requirements.

1.03 DEFINITIONS A EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. B NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A Product Data: For sleeve seals.

1.05 WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE

A. The Electrical Contractor for this work is referred to the Bidding Requirements, General Conditions, Special Conditions, Temporary Services, Plumbing, Fire Protection, HVAC and pertinent Sections of Division 1 Specifications. These sections describe work which is a part of this Contract. The following General Provisions amplify and supplement these Sections of Division 1. In cases of conflicting requirements, the stipulations set forth in Division 1 supersede and must be satisfied by the Contractor.

1.06 COORDINATION A Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:

1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated.

2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations.

3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope. 4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be

clear of obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment. B Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place

concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed. C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind

finished surfaces or otherwise concealed. Refer to Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames” for additional information.

D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."


1.07 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The Electrical Contractor must read the entire Specifications covering other branches of

work. He is responsible for coordination of his work with work performed by other trades. B. Consult all contract Drawings which may affect the location of any equipment or

apparatus furnished under this work and make minor adjustments in location as necessary to secure coordination.

C. The layout shown on the Drawings is based on a particular make of equipment. If another make of equipment is used which requires modification or changes of any description from the Drawings or Specifications, Contractor shall be responsible (as a part of this work) for making all such modifications and changes, including those involving other trades, with the cost thereof included in his Bid. The Contractor is responsible for the dimensional correctness of all items of equipment he intends to utilize, and shall coordinate same with other trades, Drawings, etc., to avoid conflicts. In such case, Contractor shall submit Drawings and Specifications prior to starting work showing all such modifications and changes. His proposal shall be subject to the approval of the Associate.

D. System layout is schematic and exact locations shall be determined by structural and other conditions. This shall not be construed to mean that the design of the system may be arbitrarily changed. The equipment layout is to fit into the building as constructed and shall be coordinated with the equipment included under other Divisions of work.

E. Contractor is to contact the Associate immediately if he notices any discrepancies or omissions in either the Drawings or the Specifications or if there are any questions regarding the meaning or intent thereof.

F. Submit all changes, other than minor adjustments, to the Associate for approval before proceeding with the work.

G. The Contractor is required to visit the site and fully inform himself concerning dimensions, existing conditions and all other conditions affecting the scope of work. Failure to visit the site shall not relieve the Contractor from any responsibility in the performance of his work.

H. All workmanship is to be of the highest quality in accordance with the best practices of the trade and performed by craftsmen skilled in this particular work.

I. Contractor is to have a competent superintendent in charge of the work installed under this Contract. Superintendent is to be experienced in this type of work.

1.08 PERMITS, INSPECTIONS AND CODES A. File all Drawings, pay all fees and obtain all necessary permits and certificates of

inspection relative to this work. B. Completed installation shall conform to ALL applicable Federal, State and Local Laws,

Codes and Ordinances including but not limited to the latest editions of the following: 1. State of Ohio Building Code (OBC) 2. Specific Construction Safety Requirements, State Industrial Commission 3. National Electrical Code (NFPA-70) 4. Life Safety Code NFPA 101 5. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) of 1971 and all amendments thereto

C. Nothing contained in the Drawings and Specifications shall be construed to conflict with these laws, codes and ordinances and they are hereby included in these Specifications.


1.09 DRAWINGS A. Drawings are schematic and show approximate locations of electrical equipment. Exact

locations should be coordinated by Contractor and verified in field. It shall be part of the Contractor's responsibility to check and verify the physical size of the specified equipment he intends to utilize.

B. Significant deviations from Drawings must be approved by the Engineer C. Engineer reserves the right to change the location of outlets and equipment (maximum

10 ft.) up to the time of roughing-in, without additional cost. D. If a typical plan or detail is shown that requires a reversed installation on the job site, the

Contractor shall be responsible for the reverse installation as part of this contract. 1.10 INSPECTION

A. Contractor arranges for and includes in his bid, inspection of this work by: the Local Authority.

1.11 GUARANTEE A. Contractor is responsible for all defects, repairs and replacements in materials and

workmanship for a period of one (1) year after final payment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Furnish new and undeteriorated materials of a quality not less than what is specified. B. Contractor is to furnish and install only those brands of equipment mentioned specifically

or accepted as substitutions. 2.02 EQUIPMENT SELECTION AND APPROVAL

A. The selection of materials and equipment to be furnished shall be governed by the following:

1. Where trade names, brands of manufacturer of equipment or materials are listed

in the Specification, the exact equipment listed shall be used in the bid. Where more than one name is listed, Contractor may select any one of the several brands specified.

B. Within ten (10) days after the award of contracts, the Contractor must submit a list to the Associate showing the names of manufacturers and subcontractors he intends to use.

2.03 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized

steel, plain ends. B. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Metal Thickness: a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270

mm) and no side more than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches (1270 mm) and 1 or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).

2.04 SLEEVE SEALS A Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space

between sleeve and raceway or cable.


1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Metraflex Co. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.

3. Pressure Plates: Plastic. Include two for each sealing element. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of

length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.05 GROUT A Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic

aggregate grout, non-corrosive, non-staining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center

of unit for wall-mounting items. C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated,

arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements.

D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope. 3.02 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. D. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. E. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. F. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and

raceway or cable, unless indicated otherwise. G. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry

1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.

H. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants".


I. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Sleeves through fire rated construction shall be packed with calcium silicate, silicone "RTV" foam, or "3M" fire rated sealants, caulking, putty strips and sheets. All penetrations of fire-resistance rated construction shall comply with the requirements of Division 7.

J. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

K. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

L. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.03 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations. B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or

cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.04 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical

installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07.

3.05 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect all fixtures against damage from leaks or abuse and pay the cost of repair or

replacement of fixtures or equipment made necessary by failure to provide suitable safeguards or protection.

B. Thoroughly clean all equipment provided under this work prior to final inspection and testing and again prior to project completion.

C. After all fixtures have been installed, thoroughly clean all fixtures, remove all stickers visible after installation and/or as directed by the Associate, remove foreign matter and leave every part in acceptable condition, clean and ready for use. Install new lamps as called for in Section 265100 Part 3 and check for satisfactory operation.

D. All scratches and chipped prime or finish coats on all electrical equipment are to be touched-up with matching paint. All dents in all electrical equipment are to be removed and the prime or finish coats touched-up. Excessive damage may require replacement.

3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING A Give the General Contractor locations and sizes of all openings required for the

installation of equipment before construction and walls are started. If it becomes necessary to cut into new work because of the failure of Contractor to notify the General Contractor, then the General Contractor shall do any necessary cutting and patching at this Contractor's expense.

B Patching must match existing surfaces in kind and finish and shall be done by the General Contractor at this Contractor's expense.

C Provide cutting and patching of existing walls and ceilings as necessary for new component and circuiting installation. Minimize size and quantity of holes and patch to match existing surface and paint.


END OF SECTION

1961 RTA WSP 2020 RENOVATIONS 26 0519 - 1 LOW-VOLTAGE ELEC. POWER DESIGN GROUP 3, LLC.

SECTION 26 0519

ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following:

1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. 3. Sleeves and sleeve seals for cables.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Field quality-control test reports. C. Submit under provisions of Division 01.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, Article 100, by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in the section

with minimum 5 years documented experience. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one by one of the following: 1. General Cable. 2. Southwire. 3. Essex. 4. Pirelli.

B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70 C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN

2.02 BUILDING WIRE A. Thermoplastic-insulated Building Wire: NEMA WC 5. B. Feeders and Branch Circuits smaller than 100 ampere: Copper stranded conductor, 600

volt insulation, THHN-THWN. C. Control Circuits: Copper, stranded conductor 600 volt insulation, THW, THHN and

THWN. 2.03 MC CABLE

A. Conductors to be class B copper, stranded. B. The conductors to be constructed with THHN/THWN insulation rated for 90oC dry or wet

at 600 volts max.


C. A copper grounding conductor is cabled with the phase conductors. In circuit applications, the grounding conductor size is based on the rating of the over-current device The ground conductor has a green insulation.

D. An interlocked steel armor is helically formed around the conductor. E. Cable to be plenum rated where installed in plenum areas. F. Note: Cable type MC AP will NOT be accepted.

2.04 COMMUNICATION CABLE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: 1. Belden CDT Inc.; Electronics Division. 2. Draka USA. 3. Mohawk; a division of Belden CDT. 4. Superior Essex Inc. 5. SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope, Inc. brand.

B. Description: 100-ohm, 4-pair UTP, formed into 25-pair, binder groups covered with a yellow thermoplastic jacket. 1. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties. 2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1 for performance specifications. 3. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Category 5e. 4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying

with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types: a. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP, complying with NFPA 262. b. Multipurpose, Plenum Rated: Type MPP, complying with NFPA 262.

2.05 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: 1. Ideal Co. “Wingnut.” 2. T & B “Piggy.” 3. 3M; Electrical Products Division. “Scotch Lock.”

B Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.

2.06 SLEEVES FOR CABLES A Sleeve materials to be as called for in Division 26 Section “Common Work Results for

Electrical.” B Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping

specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." C Sleeve seals to be installed in exterior walls above and below grade to prevent entry of

moisture into building as specified in Division 26 Section “Common Work Results for Electrical.”

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING

METHODS A. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. B. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN,

single conductors in raceway.


C. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

D. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

E. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway or Type MC Cable. Branch circuits within electrical rooms and similar dedicated areas extending from panelboads may be Type MC Cable

F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. B Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound

used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

C Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

D Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

E Support cables according to Division 26 Sections "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

F Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

G. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

H. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

I. Wiring at junction boxes: Install conductors at each box, with at least 6 inches (150 mm) of slack.

J. Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits. K. Use conductor not smaller than 14 AWG for control circuits unless noted on drawings. L. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Verify continuity of all circuit and connectors. B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

C. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to

achieve compliance with requirements. D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

END OF SECTION

1961 RTA WSP 2020 RENOVATIONS 26 0526 - 1 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS DESIGN GROUP 3, LLC.

SECTION 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.02 SUMMARY A This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and

equipment. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Field quality-control test reports.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined

in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A Bond together service equipment enclosures, exposed non-current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment, metal raceway systems, grounding conductor in raceways and cables, receptacle ground connectors, and plumbing systems.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch

(6 mm) in diameter. 4. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 5. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with

copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick. 2.02 CONNECTORS

A Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type, with at least two bolts. 6. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.


C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install stranded conductor for No 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted

connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors, except at test wells and

as otherwise indicated. 3.02 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70: 1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Flexible raceway runs.

3.03 INSTALLATION A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible,

unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care

not to penetrate any adjacent parts. 2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and

Supports: Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at ground test wells. a. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last

trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.

b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.


B. Report measured ground resistances that exceed 3 ohms. C. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values,

notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.

END OF SECTION

1961 RTA WSP 2020 RENOVATIONS 26 0529 - 1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS DESIGN GROUP 3, LLC.

SECTION 26 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS



1.02 SUMMARY A This Section includes the following:

1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.

1.03 DEFINITIONS A EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit. D. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit.

1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported

systems and its contents. B Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported

equipment and connected systems and components. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A Comply with NFPA 70. 1.06 COORDINATION

A Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These I tems are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc. c. GS Metals Corp. d. Thomas & Betts Corporation. e. Unistrut.

2. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101. C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for

types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.


D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened

portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.

2. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

3. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.

4. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 5. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 6. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.02 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES A Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of

supported equipment. B Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes

and plates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. 1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps using spring

friction action for retention in support channel. 3.02 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article. B Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will

be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb (90 kg).

C Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 2. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 3. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 4. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units.


5. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69. 7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, pull

and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.

D. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. 3.03 PAINTING

A Refer to Division 09 and architectural finish schedule.

END OF SECTION

1961 RTA WSP 2020 RENOVATIONS 26 05 33 - 1 RACEWAY AND BOXES DESIGN GROUP 3, LLC.

SECTION 26 0533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS



1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical

wiring. 1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. B. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. C. FMC: Flexible metal conduit. D. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. E. RMC: Rigid Metallic Conduit F. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. G. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber. H. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit. I. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Catalog cuts for surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes,

hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by UL or other testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 2. O-Z Gedney; a unit of General Signal. 3. Wheatland Tube Company.

B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. C. ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A. D. IMC: ANSI C80.6. E. EMT: ANSI C80.3. F. FMC: Zinc-coated steel. G. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket. H. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable:

NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed.


1. Fittings for EMT: Steel or die-cast, set-screw type. 2. Fittings for RMC and IMC to be threaded.

2.02 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: 1. Hoffman. 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. Division. 3. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 4. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 5. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary.

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1. C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed

cover. D. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 2. E. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. F. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, galvanized, cast iron with

gasketed cover. G. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous-hinge cover with flush

latch, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard

enamel. H. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Conduit: ARC 2. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC 3. Exposed Conduit at Building Canopy: ARC or LFMC. 4. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

B. Indoors: comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT 3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic,

Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

4. Damp or Wet Locations: ARC.


5. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, in damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch (16-mm) trade size. 3.02 INSTALLATION

A Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.

B Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. D. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for

ElectricalSystems." E. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for

communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. F. Conceal conduit within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. G. Route conduit parallel and perpendicular to building structure and adjacent piping.

H. Raceway Terminations: Use insulating bushings in all conduits to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

I. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of pull wire.

J. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical

damage. 3.03 PROTECTION

A Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Contract Completion. 1 Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer. END OF SECTION

1961 RTA WSP 2020 RENOVATIONS 26 0553 - 1 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS DESIGN GROUP 3, LLC.

SECTION 26 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS



1.02 SUMMARY A This Section includes the following:

1. Identification for raceway. 2. Identification for conductors.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA 70. B. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.

1.05 COORDINATION A Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied. B Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUCTOR AND COMMUNICATION- AND CONTROL-CABLE IDENTIFICATION

MATERIALS A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils

(0.08 mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide. B. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit

identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process. C. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick, with corrosion-resistant

grommet and polyester or nylon tie for attachment to conductor or cable. 1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag

manufacturer. 2.02 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, 1-piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon cable ties. 2. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 3. Tensile Strength: 50 lb (22.6 kg), minimum. 4. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C). 5. Color: Black, except where used for color-coding.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION

A. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, signal, sound, intercommunications, voice, and data connections.

1961 RTA WSP 2020 RENOVATIONS 26 0553 - 2 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS DESIGN GROUP 3, LLC.

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and Operation and Maintenance Manual.

3.02 INSTALLATION A Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient

viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. D. System Identification Color Banding for Raceways and Cables: Each color band shall

completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas.

E. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V and Less: Use the colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors. 1. Color shall be factory applied or, for sizes larger than No. 10 AWG, field applied. 2. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Red. c. Phase C: Blue.

3. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

END OF SECTION

1961 RTA WSP 2020 RENOVATIONS 26 09 23 - 1 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES DESIGN GROUP 3, LLC.

SECTION 26 0923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES



1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following lighting control devices:

1. Networked Lighting Controls. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For all components including but not limited to control modules, power distribution components, data distribution components, data injectors, terminal blocks, and conductors and cables.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail assemblies of standard components, custom assembled for specific application on this Project. 1. Outline Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, arrangement of components,

and clearance and access requirements. 2. Block Diagram: Show interconnections between components specified in this

Section and devices furnished with power distribution system components. Indicate data communication paths and identify networks, data buses, data gateways, concentrators, and other devices to be used. Describe characteristics of network and other data communication lines.

3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Coordinate nomenclature and presentation with a block diagram.

C. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: 1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On a magnetic media or compact disc, complete with

data files. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.

D. Field quality-control test reports. E. Software licenses and upgrades required by and installed for operation and programming

of digital and analog devices. F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting controls. G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that

penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke detectors, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.


1.06 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Expand existing exterior building façade lighting control system to new façade lighting

fixtures. Existing system is manufactured by Traxon, utilizing E:Cue series control components with computer software for digital multiplex (DMX) for controls. The existing system is an RGB color shift LED’s with programmed pre-set control scenes for different color shifts. New fixtures shall color shift (to the same color, at the same rate) as the existing fixtures.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 EXTERIOR FAÇADE LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Expand existing exterior building façade lighting control system. Contractor shall provide all components necessary to expand existing system and control the new exterior façade lights. This shall include all data injectors, controllers, terminal blocks, LED drivers, and cabling.

B. See the Drawings for specific component details and requirements. C. Expand existing computer software to allow for control of new components. This shall

include any/all additional necessary license. 2.02 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

B. Unsheilded twisted pair (UTP): Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

C. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

D. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

E. Cabling to system components as per manufacturer specifications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Wiring Method: Comply with Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4 inch (21 mm), where required in conduit. Where not installed in conduit, all wiring shall be plenum rated.

B. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.

3.02 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 26 Section

"Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Label all components a unique designation.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:


1. After installing components, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, adjust and test for compliance with requirements.

2. Operational Test: Verify operation of each lighting control device, and adjust programmable time delays.

B. Lighting control devices that fail tests and inspections are defective work. 3.04 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."

END OF SECTION

1961 RTA WSP 2020 RENOVATIONS 26 5600 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING DESIGN GROUP 3, LLC

1

SECTION 26 5619 EXTERIOR LIGHTING



1.02 SUMMARY A Section Includes:

1. Exterior solid-state luminaires that are designed for and exclusively use LED lamp technology.

2. Luminaire supports. 1.03 DEFINITIONS

A CCT: Correlated color temperature. B CRI: Color rendering index. C. Fixture: See "Luminaire." D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating. E. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both. F. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.

1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A Product Data: For each type of luminaire.

1. Arrange in order of luminaire designation. 2. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes. 3. Include physical description and dimensions of luminaire. 4. Lamps, include life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data.

a. Manufacturer's Certified Data: Photometric data certified by manufacturer’s laboratory with a current accreditation under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

b. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated luminaires, photometric data certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining luminaires shall be certified by manufacturer.

5. Wiring diagrams for power, control, and signal wiring. 6. Means of attaching luminaires to supports and indication that the attachment is suitable

for components involved. 1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project. Use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Luminaire manufacturers'

laboratory that is accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. B Provide luminaires from a single manufacturer for each luminaire type.


2

C. Each luminaire type shall be binned within a three-step MacAdam Ellipse to ensure color consistency among luminaires.

D. Protect finishes of exposed surfaces by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering prior to shipping.

1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A Verify existing and proposed utility structures prior to the start of work associated with luminaire

installation. 1.08 WARRANTY

A Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures, including luminaire support components. b. Faulty operation of luminaires and accessories. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. NRTL Compliance: Luminaires shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by an NRTL.

C. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1598 D. Lamp base complying with ANSI C81.61 E. Bulb shape complying with ANSI C79.1. F. Internal driver. G. Nominal Operating Voltage: As indicated on Drawings. H. Lamp Rating: Lamp marked for outdoor use I. Source Limitations: Obtain luminaires from single source from a single manufacturer. J. Source Limitations: For luminaires, obtain each color, grade, finish, type, and variety of

luminaire from single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.

2.02 PRODUCTS A MANUFACTURERS

1. As specified in Lighting Fixture Schedule. The basis of design manufacturer is listed first for each fixture.

2.03 MATERIALS A. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. B. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum. Form and support to prevent warping

and sagging. C. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under

operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or replacing lenses.

D. Diffusers and Globes:


3

1. Acrylic Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated. 3. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch ((3.175 mm)) minimum unless otherwise indicated.

E. Lens and Refractor Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors.

F. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows unless otherwise indicated: 1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.

G. Housings: 1. Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosure that will not warp, sag, or deform in

use. 2. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires.

H. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.

2.04 FINISHES A Variations in Finishes: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in

appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

B Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support materials.

C Factory-Applied Finish for Aluminum Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum

Association for designating aluminum finishes. 2. Natural Satin Finish: Provide fine, directional, medium satin polish (AA-M32); buff

complying with AA-M20 requirements; and seal aluminum surfaces with clear, hard-coat wax.

3. Class I, Clear-Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: Medium satin; Chemical Finish: Etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.

4. Class I, Color-Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: Medium satin; Chemical Finish: Etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or thicker), complying with AAMA 611. a. Color: as specified on drawings.

D Factory-Applied Finish for Steel Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, to remove dirt, oil,

grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1 or SSPC-SP 8.

2. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of primer and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel.


4

a. Color: As specified on drawings. 2.05 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.


A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire electrical conduit to verify actual locations of conduit connections before luminaire installation.

C. Examine walls for suitable conditions where luminaires will be installed. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A Comply with NECA 1. B Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the

application and approved by manufacturer. C Install lamps in each luminaire. D Fasten luminaire to structural support. E Supports:

1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight. 2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning and relamping. 3. Support luminaires without causing deflection of finished surface. 4. Luminaire-mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100

percent of luminaire weight and a vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight. F Wall-Mounted Luminaire Support:

5. Attached to structural members in walls. G. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways. Conceal raceways and cables. H. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with finished grade at heights indicated on drawings. I. Coordinate layout and installation of luminaires with other construction. J. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming. K. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables" and 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for wiring connections and wiring methods.

3.03 CORROSION PREVENTION A Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a dissimilar

metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment. B Steel Conduits: Comply with Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." In

concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch- (0.254-mm-) thick, pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied with a 50 percent overlap.

3.04 IDENTIFICATION A Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for

identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A Inspect each installed luminaire for damage. Replace damaged luminaires and components.


5

B Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative: 1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after

electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation. C Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and

interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.

3.06 ADJUSTING A Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,

provide on-site assistance in adjusting the direction of aim of luminaires to suit occupied conditions. Make up to 1visit to Project during other-than-normal hours for this purpose. Some of this work may be required during hours of darkness. 1. During adjustment visits, inspect all luminaires. Replace lamps or luminaires that are

defective. 2. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies. 3. Adjust the aim of luminaires in the presence of the Architect.

END OF SECTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND ... · BID PACKAGE E: Alternate # E-3 – MOSAIC...

Documents

Transcript of TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND ... · BID PACKAGE E: Alternate # E-3 – MOSAIC...